WO2012117487A1 - Upper limb exercising device - Google Patents

Upper limb exercising device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2012117487A1
WO2012117487A1 PCT/JP2011/054442 JP2011054442W WO2012117487A1 WO 2012117487 A1 WO2012117487 A1 WO 2012117487A1 JP 2011054442 W JP2011054442 W JP 2011054442W WO 2012117487 A1 WO2012117487 A1 WO 2012117487A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
upper limb
accessory
operation rod
cover
movable
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2011/054442
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
中村陽一
Original Assignee
村田機械株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 村田機械株式会社 filed Critical 村田機械株式会社
Priority to JP2013502065A priority Critical patent/JPWO2012117487A1/en
Priority to PCT/JP2011/054442 priority patent/WO2012117487A1/en
Publication of WO2012117487A1 publication Critical patent/WO2012117487A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H1/00Apparatus for passive exercising; Vibrating apparatus ; Chiropractic devices, e.g. body impacting devices, external devices for briefly extending or aligning unbroken bones
    • A61H1/02Stretching or bending or torsioning apparatus for exercising
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H1/00Apparatus for passive exercising; Vibrating apparatus ; Chiropractic devices, e.g. body impacting devices, external devices for briefly extending or aligning unbroken bones
    • A61H1/02Stretching or bending or torsioning apparatus for exercising
    • A61H1/0274Stretching or bending or torsioning apparatus for exercising for the upper limbs
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/01Constructive details
    • A61H2201/0173Means for preventing injuries
    • A61H2201/0176By stopping operation
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/14Special force transmission means, i.e. between the driving means and the interface with the user
    • A61H2201/1463Special speed variation means, i.e. speed reducer
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/16Physical interface with patient
    • A61H2201/1602Physical interface with patient kind of interface, e.g. head rest, knee support or lumbar support
    • A61H2201/1635Hand or arm, e.g. handle
    • A61H2201/1638Holding means therefor
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/16Physical interface with patient
    • A61H2201/1657Movement of interface, i.e. force application means
    • A61H2201/1659Free spatial automatic movement of interface within a working area, e.g. Robot
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/50Control means thereof
    • A61H2201/5007Control means thereof computer controlled
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/50Control means thereof
    • A61H2201/5023Interfaces to the user
    • A61H2201/5035Several programs selectable
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/50Control means thereof
    • A61H2201/5023Interfaces to the user
    • A61H2201/5043Displays
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/50Control means thereof
    • A61H2201/5058Sensors or detectors
    • A61H2201/5061Force sensors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/50Control means thereof
    • A61H2201/5058Sensors or detectors
    • A61H2201/5064Position sensors
    • A61H2201/5066Limit switches
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/50Control means thereof
    • A61H2201/5058Sensors or detectors
    • A61H2201/5069Angle sensors
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61HPHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS, e.g. DEVICES FOR LOCATING OR STIMULATING REFLEX POINTS IN THE BODY; ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION; MASSAGE; BATHING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL THERAPEUTIC OR HYGIENIC PURPOSES OR SPECIFIC PARTS OF THE BODY
    • A61H2201/00Characteristics of apparatus not provided for in the preceding codes
    • A61H2201/50Control means thereof
    • A61H2201/5097Control means thereof wireless

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a training apparatus, and more particularly to an upper limb training apparatus capable of training a human upper limb.
  • the conventional upper limb training apparatus includes a frame, an operation rod, and an extension / contraction drive unit.
  • the frame includes a fixed frame that can be disposed on the floor surface and a movable frame that tilts with respect to the fixed frame.
  • the movable frame is supported by the fixed frame in all directions from the tilt center.
  • the operation rod is connected to the movable frame so as to be tiltable.
  • the operating rod can be expanded and contracted vertically.
  • the movable frame can be tilted by electric drive.
  • the operation rod is driven to extend / contract by an extension / contraction drive unit disposed in the middle part.
  • An attachment according to training is detachably attached to the upper end of the operation rod.
  • the patient grasps the attachment attached to the top of the operation rod with the handicapped arm or fixes the arm to the attachment, and moves or tries to move the operation rod with the arm. It is moved by to perform recovery training.
  • Doctors and occupational therapists should appropriately determine the length of the operating rod by comprehensively judging the purpose of the training to be performed, the height of the patient, the height of the shoulder, the range of movement of the disabled arm and / or the type of attachment, etc.
  • the rod length of the operation rod is set according to the patient, but depending on the patient, the function recovery training may be performed by operating the operation rod in the extension / contraction direction.
  • doctors and occupational therapists select the most suitable attachment for training each patient from various types of attachments.
  • the doctor and occupational therapist select the upper limb training program according to the type of attachment selected here.
  • an upper limb training program corresponding to each attachment is prepared, and when a doctor and an occupational therapist select an attachment, the upper limb training program corresponding to this attachment is manually selected.
  • the doctor and occupational therapist mistakenly select the upper limb training program corresponding to the attachment, even if the patient performs training using the upper limb training apparatus, a sufficient upper limb recovery effect can be obtained. Can not.
  • An object of the present invention is to enable an upper limb training apparatus to reliably select an upper limb training program corresponding to an accessory (attachment).
  • the upper limb training apparatus is an upper limb training apparatus capable of training an upper limb of a person receiving training.
  • the upper limb training apparatus includes a fixed frame, a movable frame, an operation rod, and a control unit.
  • the fixed frame can be arranged on the floor surface.
  • the movable frame is supported by the fixed frame so as to be tiltable in all directions.
  • the operating rod is attached to the movable frame and is manually operated by a trainee.
  • the operation rod has an operation rod main body and an accessory mounting portion.
  • the accessory attachment portion is for attaching an accessory, and is attached to the distal end portion of the operation rod body.
  • the control unit controls the tilting operation of the movable frame.
  • the control unit has a signal receiving unit.
  • the signal receiving unit identifies a signal unique to the accessory in a state where the accessory is mounted on the accessory mounting unit.
  • the signal receiving part of the accessory identifies a signal unique to the accessory.
  • the signal it is possible to identify the accessory attached to the accessory mounting portion.
  • the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory can be automatically selected.
  • the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory can be selected reliably.
  • the control unit determines the type of accessory based on the signal received from the accessory.
  • the signal received from the accessory is a signal specific to the accessory, the control unit can reliably determine the type of the accessory based on this signal. Thereby, the upper limb training program corresponding to an accessory can be determined reliably.
  • the control unit may activate the upper limb training program according to the type of accessory determined based on the signal unique to the accessory, and may control the upper limb training apparatus based on the upper limb training program.
  • the control unit starts the upper limb training program according to the type of accessory and controls the upper limb training device, so doctors and occupational therapists simply attach the accessory to the accessory mounting part.
  • the training program corresponding to the product can be automatically executed. This allows the patient to perform optimal upper limb training using accessories selected by the physician and occupational therapist.
  • An electrical contact may be provided on both the accessory and the accessory mounting part, and when the accessory is mounted on the accessory mounting part, signals may be transmitted and received by wire.
  • the accessory mounting portion may have a plurality of protruding terminals that protrude outward from the upper surface of the accessory mounting portion.
  • the accessory has a plurality of contact terminals.
  • Each contact terminal corresponds to each of a plurality of protruding terminals.
  • two predetermined contact terminals among the plurality of contact terminals are short-circuited.
  • a control part determines the kind of accessory according to a conduction pattern.
  • the accessory when the accessory is mounted on the accessory mounting portion by setting different patterns for short-circuiting the two contact terminals in each accessory, the accessory is specific to the accessory.
  • the control unit can identify the signal.
  • the doctor and the occupational therapist can automatically select the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory simply by attaching the accessory to the accessory mounting portion.
  • the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory can be selected reliably.
  • the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory can be reliably selected.
  • the perspective view of the upper limb training apparatus as one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the perspective view of an upper limb training apparatus The schematic sectional drawing of a training device main part.
  • the schematic sectional drawing of a training device main part The perspective view inside a training device main part.
  • Sectional drawing of a training apparatus main body The perspective view inside a training device main part.
  • the perspective view inside a training device main part The perspective view inside a training device main part.
  • the perspective view of an operation rod The perspective view of a movable stay.
  • the schematic plan view for demonstrating the positional relationship of a monitor, a monitor arm, and a monitor rod The schematic plan view for demonstrating the positional relationship of a monitor, a monitor arm, and a monitor rod.
  • the schematic plan view for demonstrating the positional relationship of a monitor, a monitor arm, and a monitor rod The schematic plan view for demonstrating the positional relationship of a monitor, a monitor arm, and a monitor rod.
  • the side view of a monitor arm. The top view of an upper limb training apparatus.
  • the perspective view of a coupling tool The perspective view of a connection part. Sectional drawing of a connection part.
  • the perspective view of a remote control. The side view of a remote control.
  • the upper limb training apparatus 1 has impaired motor function of the upper limb (particularly the arm) due to cerebrovascular disorders and spinal cord injury. It has a function to support recovery of upper limb motor function to perform recovery training of the upper limb for the patient T.
  • the upper limb training apparatus 1 includes a training apparatus main body 3, a chair 4, a connection mechanism 5 that connects the training apparatus main body 3 and the chair 4, a monitor stand 6 that is fixed to the training apparatus main body 3 and the monitor 7 is fixed, It has.
  • the front-rear direction is the X direction in FIG. 1
  • the left-right direction is the Y direction in FIG. 1
  • the up-down direction is the Z direction in FIG.
  • the front-rear and left-right directions are defined, and the front may be represented as the back side and the rear as the front side.
  • the operation rod 15 tilts as will be described later, here, the direction when the operation rod 15 is oriented vertically upward with respect to the floor surface is defined as the Z direction, and on the plane perpendicular to the Z direction.
  • X direction and Y direction are defined.
  • the training apparatus body 3 includes a frame 10 having a fixed frame 11 and a movable frame 12, a tilting resistance applying mechanism 13, a tilting operation force detecting mechanism 14, and An operation rod 15, an expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16, an expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17, and an exterior cover 18 are provided.
  • the fixed frame 11 can be arranged on the floor surface FL.
  • the movable frame 12 is supported by the fixed frame 11 so as to be tiltable in all directions including the front-rear X direction and the left-right Y direction from the first tilt center C1.
  • the tilting resistance applying mechanism 13 applies an appropriate resistance according to the patient T when the patient T tilts the operating rod 15, or the operating rod 15 is moved to the first tilting center.
  • This is a mechanism for assisting the tilting operation of the operation rod 15 by the patient T by guiding the C1 to pivot back and forth and to the left and right or guiding the arm T by the patient T.
  • the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 is a mechanism for detecting an operation force applied to the operation rod 15 by the tilt operation of the patient T and a tilt operation vector indicating the direction of the operation force.
  • the operation rod 15 is a rod operated by the patient T for functional recovery training of the upper limbs.
  • the operating rod 15 is attached to the movable frame 12 and can be expanded and contracted in the vertical Z direction.
  • the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 is a mechanism for detecting a displacement amount of the operation rod 15 relative to the movable frame 12 by the patient T.
  • the expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 provides an appropriate resistance corresponding to the patient T when the patient T performs the expansion / contraction operation of the operation rod 15, or supports the expansion / contraction operation of the operation rod 15 by the patient T by extending / contracting the operation rod 15. Or a mechanism for guiding the vertical movement of the arm by the patient T.
  • the expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 also functions as an expansion / contraction drive unit that drives the operation rod 15 to expand and contract when the vertical position of the operation rod 15 is adjusted according to the patient T.
  • the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 is a mechanism for detecting the operation force in the vertical Z direction applied to the operation rod 15 by the vertical movement of the patient's T arm.
  • the exterior cover 18 is a cover that covers the periphery of the fixed frame 11 and the movable frame 12.
  • the fixed frame 11 is fixed to the base frame 21 that can move the floor surface FL or can be fixedly installed on the floor surface FL. And a first support bracket 22 and a second support bracket 23.
  • the base frame 21 is a plate-like frame having a substantially semicircular rear portion (the lower right end portion in FIG. 5).
  • One free wheel 21a with casters is arranged on the lower surface of the rear part of the base frame 21, and a pair of fixed wheels 21b arranged at intervals in the left-right direction are arranged on the lower surface of the front part.
  • a pair of fixing adjusters 21c for disposing the training apparatus main body 3 so as to be immovable on the floor surface FL are disposed on both sides of the center portion in the front-rear direction of the base frame 21.
  • a stand fixing part 21d to which the lower end of the monitor stand 6 is fixed is arranged in the center of the front part of the base frame 21.
  • a stand support plate 25 is disposed above the front portion of the base frame 21 so as to extend in the left-right direction in parallel with the stand fixing portion 21d.
  • the stand support plate 25 is fixed by a pair of fixing brackets 26 whose left and right ends are raised and fixed to the base frame 21. As shown in FIG.
  • the stand support plate 25 has a stand support hole 25a that supports the base end portion 6a of the monitor stand 6 in a non-rotatable manner at the center. Further, the distal end of the base end portion 6 a of the monitor stand 6 is fixed so as not to rotate in a hole (not shown) formed in the stand fixing portion 21 d of the base frame 21. As described above, since the base end portion 6a of the monitor stand 6 is supported by the base frame 21 and the stand support plate 25 so as not to move at the upper and lower portions, the monitor stand is not easily displaced in the radial direction or the tilt direction.
  • the posture of the monitor stand 6 with respect to the base frame 21 is maintained firmly. That is, the mounting strength of the monitor stand 6 is high, and it is difficult for a problem that the monitor stand 6 wobbles with respect to the mounting portion. Since the monitor stand 6 also functions as a part of the carry handle as will be described later, it is important that the mounting strength is improved as described above.
  • the 1st support bracket 22 and the 2nd support bracket 23 are arrange
  • the first support bracket 22 and the second support bracket 23 are formed by bending a steel plate, for example, and support the movable frame 12 at both ends in a tiltable manner.
  • the first support bracket 22 is fixed to the rear portion (front side) of the base frame 21.
  • the first support bracket 22 has a pair of left and right first fixed portions 22a and a first support portion 22b that connects the pair of first fixed portions 22a at the top.
  • the first fixed portion 22 a is formed by bending both ends of the first support portion 22 b and is fixed to the base frame 21.
  • the second support bracket 23 is fixed to the base frame 21 at a position facing the front of the first support bracket 22.
  • the 2nd support bracket 23 is the structure substantially the same as the 1st support bracket 22, and has a pair of 2nd fixing
  • the first support bracket 22 and the second support bracket 23 are reinforced by a reinforcing member 24.
  • the reinforcing member 24 is a plate-like member having a D shape in plan view.
  • the reinforcing member 24 constitutes a part of the tilt range regulating mechanism 20 that structurally regulates the tilt range of the operation rod 15.
  • the tilt range restriction mechanism 20 will be described later.
  • the reinforcing member 24 includes a pair of first reinforcing portions 24a that connect both outer surfaces of the first fixing portion 22a and the second fixing portion 23a, a second reinforcing portion 24b that connects the inner surface of the second fixing portion 23a, and a first And a third reinforcing portion 24c that connects the inner surface of the fixed portion 22a.
  • a pair of 1st reinforcement part 24a and 2nd reinforcement part 24b are the members of the circular arc shape by planar view formed integrally.
  • the pair of first reinforcing portions 24a is a line-symmetric member.
  • the end surfaces on the inner peripheral side of the pair of first reinforcing portion 24a and second reinforcing portion 24b are formed in an arc shape.
  • the 3rd reinforcement part 24c has connected between the inner surfaces of the 1st fixing
  • the movable frame 12 has a first gimbal mechanism 30 as shown in FIGS.
  • the first gimbal mechanism 30 includes a first movable part 31 that is rotatably attached to the fixed frame 11 and a second movable part 32 that is rotatably attached to the first movable part 31. .
  • the first movable portion 31 is a plate-like member formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape formed by bending a steel plate at four locations.
  • the first movable portion 31 is supported at both ends by the first support bracket 22 and the second support bracket 23 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear X direction.
  • the second movable part 32 is a member made of a steel plate that is disposed inside the first movable part 31 and is bent into a rectangular frame shape smaller than the first movable part 31.
  • the second movable part 32 is supported at both ends by the first movable part 31 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the left-right Y direction.
  • the position where the first movable portion 31 is pivotally supported and the position where the second movable portion 32 is pivotally supported are the same vertical Z-direction position. Therefore, the rotation axis X1 of the first movable part 31 and the rotation axis Y1 of the second movable part 32 are arranged orthogonally. The intersection of the rotation axis X1 and the rotation axis Y1 is the first tilt center C1.
  • the tilt resistance imparting mechanism 13 includes an electric X-axis motor 35 for rotationally driving the outer first movable portion 31, and an X-axis. And an X-axis reduction mechanism 36 that transmits the rotation of the output shaft of the motor 35 at a reduced speed.
  • the tilting resistance imparting mechanism 13 transmits an electric Y-axis motor 33 for rotationally driving the inner second movable portion 32 and the rotation of the output shaft of the Y-axis motor 33 to reduce and transmit it. And further.
  • the X-axis motor 35 and the X-axis reduction mechanism 36 are fixed to the second support bracket 23, for example.
  • the X-axis speed reduction mechanism 36 is connected to the first movable part 31 and transmits the rotation of the output shaft of the X-axis motor 35 to the first movable part 31 with a reduction ratio of about 1/60.
  • the X-axis motor 35 is disposed at a position close to the floor surface FL in the up-down Z direction with the X-axis reduction mechanism 36, and is connected to the X-axis reduction mechanism 36 by a toothed belt (not shown).
  • the Y-axis motor 33 and the Y-axis speed reduction mechanism 34 are fixed to, for example, the outer first movable part 31.
  • the Y-axis reduction mechanism 34 is connected to the second movable part 32, and transmits the rotation of the output shaft of the Y-axis motor 33 to the second movable part 32 with a reduction ratio of about 1/60.
  • the Y-axis motor 33 is disposed at a position closer to the floor surface FL in the up-down Z direction than the Y-axis reduction mechanism 34 and is connected to the Y-axis reduction mechanism 34 by a toothed belt (not shown).
  • the tilting amount of the operating rod 15 includes at least one of the angular position and the angular displacement calculated based on the outputs of the X-axis rotary encoder 37 and the Y-axis rotary encoder 38 and the rotation direction.
  • the tilt resistance applying mechanism 13 drives and controls at least one of the angular position and the amount of angular displacement of the X-axis motor 33 and the Y-axis motor 35 and the rotation direction according to the operation force of the patient T detected by the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14. To provide resistance to the operating rod 15.
  • the X-axis motor 33 and the Y-axis motor 35 are disposed below the first tilt center C1.
  • the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 is disposed between the movable frame 12 of the frame 10 and the operation rod 15, as shown in FIGS.
  • the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 includes tilt operation forces and tilt directions in all directions from the first tilt center C1 including the front-rear X direction and the left-right Y direction applied to the operation rod 15 by the tilt operation of the patient T as described above.
  • This is a mechanism for detecting a tilt operation vector. That is, the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 detects the direction of the operation force of the patient T when the operation rod 15 is tilted and the magnitude of the operation force.
  • the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 includes a load member 42 and a vector detection unit 39.
  • the vector detection unit 39 detects the tilting operation force acting on the operation rod 15 by the displacement of the load member 42 and the tilting direction of the operation rod 15.
  • the vector detection unit 39 includes a second gimbal mechanism 40, an X-axis potentiometer 41b, and a Y-axis potentiometer 41a.
  • the load member 42 is displaced according to the operating force and the tilting direction.
  • the load member 42 is displaced by generating a predetermined elastic resistance force corresponding to the tilting amount regardless of the tilting direction.
  • This displacement is detected by the vector detection unit 39, and a tilting operation vector including the tilting direction and tilting operation force of the patient T is detected.
  • the vector detecting unit 39 suppresses the direction dependency of the load member and the tilt detection force and tilt.
  • a tilt operation vector including a direction can be detected. For this reason, the tilting operation vector of the patient T can be detected with high accuracy regardless of which direction the operating rod 15 is tilted. Using this detection result, for example, an appropriate load can be applied to the patient T to train the upper limb of the patient T.
  • the second gimbal mechanism 40 is supported by the movable frame 12 so as to be tiltable in all directions from the second tilt center C2.
  • the second gimbal mechanism 40 includes a third movable part 43 that is rotatably attached to the second movable part 32, and a fourth movable part 44 that is rotatably attached to the third movable part 43. ing.
  • the third movable part 43 is connected to the second movable part 32 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear X direction.
  • the third movable portion 43 is a steel plate member that is disposed inside the second movable portion 32 and is bent into a rectangular frame shape smaller than the second movable portion 32.
  • the fourth movable portion 44 is connected to the third movable portion 43 so as to be rotatable about the axis in the left-right Y direction.
  • the fourth movable portion 44 is a member made of a steel plate that is disposed inside the third movable portion 43 and is formed by being bent into a rectangular frame shape smaller than the third movable portion 43.
  • Four rod fixing portions 44a for fixing the operation rod 15 are formed on the upper portion of the fourth movable portion 44 by bending them into two opposing pieces.
  • the position where the third movable part 43 is rotatably supported and the position where the fourth movable part 44 is rotatably supported are the same vertical Z-direction position. Therefore, the rotation axis X2 of the third movable part 43 and the rotation axis Y2 of the fourth movable part 44 are arranged orthogonally. Further, in this embodiment, when the operating rod 15 is directed upward without being tilted, in the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40, the rotation axis X1 and the rotation axis X2 are on the same line. The rotation axis Y1 and the rotation axis Y2 are arranged on the same line.
  • the support positions of the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40 are at the same height position in the vertical Z-axis direction. That is, the position where the movable frame 12 is pivotally supported with respect to the fixed frame 11 and the position where the operation rod 15 is pivotally supported with respect to the movable frame 12 are arranged on the same plane. ing.
  • the intersection of the rotation axis X2 and the rotation axis Y2 is the second tilt center C2, and is at the same position as the first tilt center C1.
  • the X-axis potentiometer 41b is fixed to the second movable part 32 and detects the amount of rotation around the rotation axis X2 of the third movable part 43.
  • the Y-axis potentiometer 41a is fixed to the third movable part 43 and detects the amount of rotation around the rotation axis Y2 of the fourth movable part 44.
  • the load member 42 is displaced by generating a predetermined elastic resistance force corresponding to the amount of tilting of the operation rod 15 regardless of the tilting direction. That is, the load member 42 is a member having a small direction dependency. As shown in FIG. 9, the load member 42 includes a plurality of (for example, four) plates disposed between the second movable portion 32 of the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the fourth movable portion 44 of the second gimbal mechanism 40. A spring 45 is provided. A pair of fixed brackets 32 a and a pair of fixed brackets 44 b for fixing the leaf spring 45 are respectively formed on the second movable part 32 and the fourth movable part 44 so as to extend downward. As shown in FIGS.
  • the four leaf springs 45 are each formed by cutting out a thin metal plate and have the same shape.
  • a thin metal spacer 46a is arranged between the four leaf springs 45 and in the uppermost layer. Thereby, interference between the leaf springs 45 when the load member 42 is displaced can be avoided, and the leaf spring 45 is likely to displace the central portion 45a relative to the outer peripheral portion 45b. For this reason, the tilting operation vector can be detected with high accuracy.
  • Each leaf spring 45 has a central part 45a, an outer peripheral part 45b on the outer peripheral side, and a spiral part 45c having one end connected to the central part 45a and the other end connected to the outer peripheral part 45b.
  • the lower end portion of the operation rod 15 is disposed at the central portion 45 a of the leaf spring 45, and the spiral portion 45 c is displaced according to the tilting operation force of the operation rod 15.
  • the distal end portion of the fixed bracket 44b of the fourth movable portion 44 to which the operation rod 15 is fixed is fixed to the central portion 45a. Since the spiral part 45c is disposed between the outer peripheral part 45b and the central part 45a, the operation rod 15 fixed to the central part 45a is easily deformed with respect to the outer peripheral part 45b.
  • the width of the spiral portion 45c is substantially constant. As a result, the spiral portion 45c is likely to generate a predetermined elastic resistance force with respect to the tilt amount regardless of the tilt direction.
  • the spacer 46a is a ring-shaped member disposed so as to overlap the outer peripheral portion 45b.
  • a washer 46b having the same thickness as the spacer 46a is disposed between the central portions 45a.
  • the spiral leaf spring 45 can easily process the outer peripheral portion 45b and the central portion 45a and can perform processing with high accuracy. For this reason, the load member which suppressed direction dependence can be created easily with sufficient accuracy.
  • the outer peripheral portion 45b has a perfect circular shape, and the spacer 46a and the outer peripheral surface have the same shape. Therefore, when the four leaf springs 45 and the four spacers are arranged so as to overlap each other, the outer peripheral surface of the load member 42 is arranged in a circular shape. As a result, a smooth appearance can be obtained even if the outer peripheral portion of the leaf spring 45 and the spacer 46a are overlapped, and the load member 42 can be easily used as a tilt limiting member (described later) in the tilt direction of the operating rod 15. .
  • the load member 42 functions as a tilt limiting member for limiting the tilting range of the operating rod 15 in the tilting range regulating mechanism 20 (see FIG. 7) that mechanically regulates the tilting range of the operating rod 15. Also have. That is, the load member 42, that is, the tilt limiting member contacts the reinforcing member 24, and the tilt range of the operation rod 15 is structurally restricted.
  • the spacer 46a and the outer peripheral part 45b of the leaf spring 45 have the same perfect circular shape, even if the load member 42 is used as the tilt limiting member, the spacer 46a tilts with respect to the inner peripheral side end surface of the reinforcing member 24. Regardless of the direction, the load member 42 can be brought into point contact. For this reason, the operation rod 15 can be regulated at substantially the same tilt angle regardless of the tilt direction.
  • the outer peripheral portion 45b is fixed to the fixed bracket 32a of the second movable portion 32 by, for example, four bolt members 19a.
  • the plurality of leaf springs 45 are attached to the movable frame 12 in a lump.
  • the load member 42 can be easily attached and detached.
  • the central portion 45a is fixed to the bottom surface of the fixed bracket 44b of the fourth movable portion 44, for example, by one bolt member 19b.
  • the lower end part of the operating rod 15 is arrange
  • the four leaf springs 45 are arranged with the front and back reversed and 180 degrees out of phase.
  • the plate spring 45 in the second stage from the bottom is arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees with respect to the plate spring 45 arranged in the lowermost stage.
  • the second-stage leaf spring 45 from above the upper side is disposed so as to be reversed with respect to the second-stage plate spring 45 from the bottom.
  • the uppermost leaf spring 45 is arranged 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the leaf spring 45 of the second step surface from above.
  • the spiral part 45c is arranged concentrically with the first arc part 45d having a smaller diameter than the first arc part 45d and a first arc part 45d arranged concentrically with the outer peripheral part 45b.
  • Second arc portion 45e Since the first arc portion 45d and the second arc portion 45e have small direction dependency, the direction dependency of the spiral portion 45c can be reduced.
  • the spiral part 45c includes a first connection part 45f that connects the outer peripheral part 45b and the first arc part 45d, a second connection part 45g that connects the first arc part 45d and the second arc part 45e, A second arc portion 45e and a third connecting portion 45h for connecting the central portion 45a.
  • the first arc portion 45d and the second arc portion 45e occupy an angular range of 3/4 or more of the spiral portion 45c. Since the first arc portion 45d and the second arc portion 45e having a small direction dependency occupy a large area of the spiral portion 45c, the direction dependency of the spiral portion 45c is reduced.
  • the first connection part 45f, the second connection part 45g, and the third connection part 45h are arranged so as to be biased in the same predetermined angular range.
  • the 1st connection part 45f, the 2nd connection part 45g, and the 3rd connection part 45h are arranged in the angle range between the starting point and the end point of the 1st circular arc part 45d and the 2nd circular arc part 45e. Since the first connection part 45f, the second connection part 45g, and the third connection part 45h having a large direction dependency are arranged in a predetermined angular range, the phase is changed and / or the front and back are reversed. By arranging the first connection part 45f, the second connection part 45g, and the third connection part 45h, it is possible to cancel the direction dependency due to the first connection part 45f, the second connection part 45g, and the third connection part 45h. .
  • the load member 42 includes the four leaf springs 45, and the two leaf springs 45 and the remaining two leaf springs 45 are arranged so as to be reversed alternately and overlap each other.
  • Two leaf springs 45 arranged in the same direction are arranged with the phase shifted by 180 degrees.
  • four types of leaf springs 45 having different front and back surfaces and phases are arranged in an overlapping manner, so that the tilt operation vector can be detected with high accuracy while suppressing the direction dependency of the load member 42.
  • the load member can be alternately and alternately placed with the half leaf spring and the remaining half leaf spring reversed.
  • the load member can be alternately and alternately placed with the half leaf spring and the remaining half leaf spring reversed.
  • the load member is not an even number, if the load member has a plurality of leaf springs, the rotational direction of at least one spiral portion of the leaf spring can be shifted.
  • the elastic resistance force differs between the leaf springs arranged out of phase and the leaf springs not displaced, and the tilting operation can be performed with high accuracy while suppressing the direction dependency of the load member.
  • a vector can be detected.
  • the operation rod 15 is supported by the movable frame 12 so as to be tiltable in the front-rear X direction and the left-right Y direction by the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14.
  • the operating rod 15 has an operating rod main body 57 and an attachment mounting portion 59.
  • the operation rod main body 57 includes an expansion / contraction mechanism 47 and a rod cover 48 that covers the periphery of the expansion / contraction mechanism 47.
  • the telescopic mechanism 47 includes a fixed stay 49, a movable stay 50 that moves up and down relative to the fixed stay 49, a linear guide 51 that linearly guides the movable stay 50, and a movable stay. And an elevating mechanism 52 that raises and lowers 50.
  • the fixed stay 49 is attached to the movable frame 12, and more specifically, is fixed from above to the rod fixing portion 44a of the fourth movable portion 44 of the tilting operation force detection mechanism 14 shown in FIGS. . Thereby, the fixed stay 49 can be removed from the second gimbal mechanism 40 with the exterior cover 18 removed. For this reason, the operation rod 15 can be attached to and detached from the movable frame 12, and the operation rod 15 can be exchanged according to the training contents and the training environment or when a failure occurs.
  • the fixed stay 49 is a member formed by bending a steel plate so that the cross section has a grooved steel shape.
  • An L-shaped fixing bracket 49 b fixed to the rod fixing portion 44 a of the fourth movable portion 44 is fixed to the left and right surfaces on the lower end side of the fixed stay 49.
  • a motor support portion 49 a formed by bending 90 degrees is formed below the fixed stay 49.
  • a Z-axis motor 61 is fixed to the lower surface of the motor support 49a.
  • a guide rail 53 that constitutes the linear guide 51 and is long in the vertical direction is fixed to the inner side surface of the fixed stay 49 (see FIG. 11).
  • a ball screw shaft 55 constituting an elevating mechanism 52 extending over the upper and lower ends is rotatably supported at the lower end of the fixed stay 49.
  • the movable stay 50 is a member that is disposed inside the fixed stay 49 and is long in the vertical direction.
  • the movable stay 50 includes an inner frame member 50a and an outer frame member 50b formed by bending a steel plate so that the cross section has a gate shape (double housing) shape.
  • the outer frame member 50b is disposed opposite to the outer surface of the inner frame member 50a so that the movable stay 50 has a rectangular cross section.
  • the slide unit 54 guided by the guide rail 53 is fixed to the block 50d below the inner frame member 50a.
  • the inner frame member 50a holds the slide unit 54 with the block 50d and the slide unit 54 sandwiched from both sides.
  • the slide unit 54 and the guide rail 53 constitute a linear guide 51.
  • a ball nut 56 constituting the elevating mechanism 52 is fixed to the block 50d, which is a portion where the slide unit 54 is fixed to the inner frame member 50a.
  • the ball nut 56 is screwed onto the ball screw shaft 55.
  • the movable stay 50 is linearly movable along the fixed stay 49 in the expansion / contraction direction (vertical Z direction).
  • the ball nut 56 and the slide unit 54 are attached to the block 50d fixed to the movable stay 50, and the block 50d and the slide unit 54 are attached to the movable stay 50 so as to be sandwiched from both sides. Further, the ball screw shaft 55 and the guide rail 53 are attached to the fixed stay 49. For this reason, the slide unit 54 and the ball nut 56 are less likely to be misaligned with respect to the movable stay 50, and the strength of the fixed stay 49 can be improved.
  • the lower end portion 50c of the inner frame member 50a is a detected portion 58 having a detected piece 58a that hangs downward.
  • the detected part 58 is provided for detecting the lower end position of the movable stay 50 detected by the lower end position detecting part 60.
  • the lower end position detection unit 60 is, for example, a light emitting / receiving photoelectric sensor (photo interrupter) 60 a fixed to the fixed stay 49.
  • the photoelectric sensor 60a detects the lower end position of the movable stay 50 by blocking the opened optical path by the detected piece 58a.
  • the lower end position of the movable stay 50 can be arranged as low as possible.
  • the lower end position detecting unit 60 that requires wiring for sending a signal is fixed to the fixed stay 49, the wiring is difficult to cut even if the operation rod 15 expands and contracts.
  • the ball screw shaft 55 Only the lower end of the ball screw shaft 55 is rotatably supported on the fixed stay 49 by a bearing. A lower end portion of the ball screw shaft 55 is coupled to an output shaft 61 a of an electric Z-axis motor 61 through a coupling 62 so as to be integrally rotatable.
  • the output shaft 61a and the ball screw shaft 55 are arranged concentrically.
  • the tilting range of the operating rod 15 is limited by the control based on the moving range regulation program and the tilting range regulation mechanism 20.
  • Control based on the movement range regulation program is executed by the storage unit 100 and the control unit 110 included in the training apparatus body 3 as shown in FIG.
  • the storage unit 100 stores various data.
  • the storage unit 100 temporarily and / or long-term stores various programs, various parameters, various data, data being processed, and the like.
  • the storage unit 100 includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) and a RAM (Random Access Memory).
  • the control unit 110 issues control signals to various mechanisms and controls the various mechanisms.
  • the control unit 110 executes various determination processes, and controls various mechanisms based on the determination results.
  • the control unit 110 reads various programs related to control and calculation from the storage unit 100 to execute various controls, various determination processes, and various calculations, and controls various mechanisms.
  • the control unit 110 includes, for example, a CPU (Central Processing Unit).
  • the control unit 110 is connected to the storage unit 100 via the bus 115.
  • the movement range restriction program is for restricting the movable range of the movable frame 12 and is stored in the storage unit 100.
  • the control unit 110 controls the operation of the movable frame 12 based on the movement range restriction program.
  • the movement range regulation program includes a detection unit 111 that detects the operation of the movable frame 12, a calculation unit 112 that calculates a state angle h that indicates the tilting state of the movable frame 12, and the state of the movable frame 12.
  • a monitoring unit 113 that monitors whether the angle h exceeds a predetermined angle, and an operation stop unit 114 that stops the operation of the movable frame 12 when the state angle h of the movable frame 12 exceeds a predetermined angle.
  • the above state angle h corresponds to the angle formed by the axis (Z axis) perpendicular to the floor surface and the axis of the operating rod 15 with respect to the first tilt center C1. That is, the state angle h corresponds to an angle obtained by combining the tilt angle ⁇ x around the X axis and the tilt angle ⁇ y around the Y axis.
  • the detection unit 111 detects the operation of the movable frame 12 (S1). More specifically, the detection unit 111 detects the outputs of the X-axis rotary encoder 37 and the Y-axis rotary encoder 38. Then, the calculation unit 112 calculates the state angle h and the maximum of the movable frame 12 based on the outputs of the X-axis rotary encoder 37 and the Y-axis rotary encoder 38, for example, the tilt angle ⁇ x about the X axis and the tilt angle ⁇ y about the Y axis. The state angle h is calculated at predetermined time intervals (S2).
  • the maximum state angle H is the maximum value of the state angle h permitted in the control based on the movement range restriction program.
  • the maximum state angle H is set to an appropriate value by comprehensively considering the safety and effect of training.
  • the monitoring unit 113 constantly monitors whether or not the state angle h of the movable frame 12 exceeds the maximum state angle H (S3), and the state angle h of the movable frame 12 exceeds the maximum state angle H.
  • the operation stop unit 114 issues a drive stop command to the tilting resistance applying mechanism 13.
  • the tilting resistance imparting mechanism 13 stops its operation, and the movable frame 12, that is, the operating rod 15, becomes unable to move to a range exceeding the maximum state angle H (S4).
  • the tilt range of the operation rod 15 (second tilt range described later). Is set. Thereby, even if the patient T operates the operation rod 15 in any direction, the operation rod 15 cannot move beyond the predetermined tilting range, so that the patient T is less likely to slide off the chair 4 and the patient T T safety can be secured.
  • the tilting range in which the operating rod 15 can be structurally operated is a tilting range in which the operating rod 15 can be operated in a state where the movable frame 12 is controlled based on the movement range regulation program.
  • the first tilt range is set to a tilt range that is, for example, about 3 degrees larger than the second tilt range.
  • the second tilt range is smaller than the first tilt range. That is, the maximum state angle H is set so that the second tilt range is smaller than the first tilt range.
  • the maximum state angle H is set so that the second tilt range is smaller than the first tilt range by, for example, about 10 degrees.
  • the tilting range restriction mechanism 20 includes a stopper portion 24d for restricting the tilting of the operating rod 15, and a load member 42 (tilting restriction member) that contacts the stopper portion 24d.
  • the stopper portion 24d is an end surface on the inner peripheral side of the reinforcing members 24a to 24c.
  • the operating rod 15 tilts and the load member 42 contacts the stopper portion 24d as a tilt limiting member, so that the tilting range of the operating rod 15 is structurally limited.
  • the shape and range of the end surface on the inner peripheral side of the reinforcing member 24 c are formed so that the operating rod 15 does not interfere with the monitor 7.
  • the stopper 24d that is, the end surface on the inner peripheral side of the reinforcing member 24 is formed in a D shape in plan view.
  • the maximum movable range 320 of the load member 42 when the load member 42 moves along the end surface on the inner peripheral side of the reinforcing member 24 also has a D shape in plan view (see FIG. 27).
  • the first tilt range is larger than the second tilt range
  • the first maximum movable range of the end portion of the operating rod 15 limited by the stopper portion 24d is controlled based on the moving range regulation program. It is larger than the second maximum movable range at the end of the operating rod 15.
  • the second maximum movable range is set in correspondence with the movable range of the movable frame 12 controlled based on the movement range restriction program.
  • a part of the stopper portion 24d for example, the third reinforcing portion 24c of the reinforcing member 24 determines the maximum inclination of the operating rod 15 forward (back side, left side in FIG. 27) when viewed from the patient T. It is a part to do.
  • the 3rd reinforcement part 24c restrict
  • the third reinforcing portion 24c is provided at a position lower than the first reinforcing portion 24a and the second reinforcing portion 24b, and the inner peripheral portion protrudes toward the first tilting center C1.
  • the inclination angle of the operation rod 15 when the load member 42 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the protruding portion of the third reinforcing portion 24c is such that the load member 42 has the inner peripheral surface of the first reinforcing portion 24a and the second reinforcing surface. It becomes smaller than the inclination angle of the operating rod 15 when it contacts the inner peripheral surface of the portion 24b.
  • the absolute value of the difference between the inclination angles is set to about 10 degrees, for example.
  • the movable frame 12 operates according to the tilt of the operation rod 15. Then, the state angle h of the movable frame 12 is calculated.
  • the tilting resistance applying mechanism 13 stops its operation, and the operation rod 15 cannot move to the tilt range exceeding the maximum state angle H.
  • the operation rod 15 is finally restricted by the tilt range restriction mechanism 20. Specifically, the operation rod 15 becomes inoperable when the operation rod 15 contacts the stopper portion 24d.
  • the control unit 110 restricts the movable range of the movable frame 12 and restricts the tilting range of the operation rod 15. Is controlling. For this reason, even if the patient T has operated the operation rod 15 larger than necessary, the operation rod 15 cannot operate outside the range in which the patient T can safely operate. As described above, in the upper limb training apparatus 1, the movable range of the movable frame 12 is limited by the control unit 110 so that the patient T can safely train.
  • the stopper portion 24d determines the maximum forward tilt of the operation rod 15 as viewed from the patient T. For this reason, even if the patient T has operated the operation rod 15 largely forwards more than necessary, the patient T can safely train without falling forward.
  • the linear portion of the stopper portion 24d is provided lower than the other portion of the stopper portion 24d on the floor surface side, so that the maximum inclination of the operation rod 15 forward is achieved. Is set smaller. Thereby, even if the patient T has operated the operation rod 15 forward (back side) more than necessary, the operation rod 15 cannot move forward (back side) larger than the maximum inclination. Patient T can be safely trained.
  • the maximum movable range of the end portion of the operating rod 15 is D-shaped in plan view. For this reason, for example, when the D-shaped linear portion is set as a portion that restricts the forward movement (back side) of the operation rod 15, the forward movement of the operation rod 15 is uniformly restricted at the same position.
  • the Furthermore, the right and left and rear (front side) restrictions of the operating rod 15 are formed along the curve of the stopper portion 24d.
  • the tilting range of the operation rod 15 is further limited by the moving range restricting mechanism 20 after being restricted based on the moving range restricting program. That is, when the patient T operates the operation rod 15, first, the tilt range of the operation rod 15 is limited by software based on the movement range restriction program, and then the tilt of the operation rod 15 is tilted by the tilt range restriction mechanism 20.
  • the range is structurally limited. Thereby, even when the patient T suddenly operates the operation rod 15 and the control by the movement range restriction program cannot follow, the movement of the operation rod 15 can be reliably restricted by the tilt range restriction mechanism 20.
  • the maximum movable range to the front (back side) of the movable frame 12 is also set so that the operation rod 15 does not interfere with the monitor. Even if the operation is performed more than necessary, there is no possibility that the hand of the patient T collides with the monitor.
  • each attachment AT has a plurality of contact terminals 159 as shown in FIG.
  • the outer shape of the bottom surface side of the attachment AT is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and a plurality of contact terminals 159 provided on the bottom surface are indicated by solid lines.
  • Each contact terminal 159 corresponds to each of a plurality of pin terminals 84a described later. That is, the plurality of contact terminals 159 are provided in the attachment AT so that the contact terminals 159 and the pin terminals 84a corresponding to the contact terminals 159 can contact each other.
  • each of the plurality of attachments AT two predetermined contact terminals 159 among the plurality of contact terminals 159 are short-circuited.
  • the combination of the two contact terminals 159 that are short-circuited in each of the plurality of attachments AT is different. That is, the plurality of contact terminals 159 are provided in each attachment AT so that the pattern (short circuit pattern) in which the two contact terminals 159 are short-circuited in each of the plurality of attachments AT is different.
  • FIG. 23 shows a state in which the contact terminals 159 adjacent to the center contact terminal 159 in each row are short-circuited to each other.
  • the attachment attachment portion 59 is for detachably attaching the attachment AT corresponding to the training program for the patient T, and is attached to the upper end portion of the movable stay 50.
  • the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 is attached to the attachment attachment portion 59.
  • the attachment attachment portion 59 includes an attachment member 70 attached to the movable stay 50, an axial movement permission member 80 attached to the attachment member 70 so as to be movable in the axial direction, and an attachment member.
  • a plurality of positioning members 95 for positioning, and a reference member 88 serving as a reference when detecting an operation force in the vertical Z direction applied to the operation rod 15 in the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 are provided.
  • the mounting member 70 has a stay mounting portion 71 mounted on the movable stay 50 and a shaft portion 72 provided on the stay mounting portion 71.
  • the stay mounting portion 71 includes a disc portion 71a formed in a disc shape, and a pair of rectangular plate portions 71b (see FIGS. 23 and 24) that are integrally formed to protrude downward from the surface of the disc portion 71a. Only one is displayed).
  • the disc portion 71a has a through hole 71c formed at the center.
  • the pair of rectangular plate portions 71b are formed to face each other.
  • Each rectangular plate portion 71 b is formed with a plurality of bolt holes, for example, four bolt holes, and the movable stay 50 is also formed with bolt holes corresponding to the bolt holes.
  • the mounting member 70 is mounted on the movable stay 50 by inserting a bolt member into the bolt hole of each rectangular plate portion 71 b and the bolt hole of the movable stay 50 and screwing a nut member into the bolt member.
  • the shaft portion 72 includes a shaft portion main body 72a formed in a cylindrical shape, and a flange portion 72b for the shaft portion integrally formed on the outer periphery on the lower end side of the shaft portion main body 72a.
  • the shaft movement permission member 80 has a cylindrical portion 81 that is slidably mounted on the shaft portion 72 and an exterior portion 82 that covers the cylindrical portion 81.
  • the cylindrical portion 81 has an annular groove portion 81a formed on the lower end side, a first flange portion 81b for the cylindrical portion formed on the upper end side, and a predetermined portion on one end side from the first flange portion 81b for the cylindrical portion.
  • the second flange portion 81c for the cylindrical portion formed with an interval of and the step portion 81d formed on the inner peripheral surface.
  • the exterior portion 82 includes an exterior portion main body 83, a terminal attachment member 84 to which a terminal for identifying the type of the attachment AT is attached, a cover member 85, and a plurality of pin members 86 for attaching the attachment AT. is doing.
  • the exterior body 83 is formed in a circular shape in plan view.
  • the exterior portion main body 83 includes a concave circular first step portion 83a, a second step portion 83b formed to be recessed with a smaller diameter than the first step portion 83a at the bottom center of the first step portion 83a, and a second step. And a through hole 83c formed in the center of the bottom of the portion 83b.
  • the first flange portion 81b of the shaft movement permission member 80 is fitted to the second step portion 83b. More specifically, the outer peripheral surface of the first flange portion 81b of the shaft movement permission member 80 is fitted to the wall portion of the second step portion 83b, and the shaft movement permission member is disposed to the bottom of the second step portion 83b. The surface on the end side of the first first flange portion 81b of 80 is brought into contact.
  • the terminal mounting member 84 is formed in a circular shape in plan view.
  • a plurality of terminals 84a for example, ten pin terminals are mounted on the terminal mounting member 84 in such a manner that their contact portions are exposed upward.
  • the cord extending from each of the plurality of pin terminals 84 a passes through the inside of the terminal mounting member 84 and extends below the terminal mounting member 84.
  • FIG. 24 only a part of the code is shown.
  • Such a terminal mounting member 84 is mounted in the through hole 83 c of the exterior body 83. More specifically, the surface of the terminal mounting member 84 opposite to the surface where the pin terminal 84a is exposed faces the end of the shaft movement permission member 80 on the side where the first flange portion 81b is formed.
  • the terminal mounting member 84 is fitted into the through hole 83 c of the exterior body 83.
  • the cover member 85 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a larger diameter than the exterior body 83. On the opening side above the cover member 85, an annular flange 85a is integrally formed.
  • the cover member 85 is attached to the exterior part main body 83 by fitting the inner peripheral surface of the annular flange 85 a to the outer peripheral surface of the exterior part main body 83.
  • an annular groove 85 b for mounting the positioning member 95 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85.
  • the plurality of pin members 86 are fitted into mounting holes formed in the attachment AT so as to be recessed from the lower surface. As a result, the attachment AT is attached to the exterior portion 82, that is, the attachment attachment portion 59.
  • a plurality of pin members 86 for example, two pin members are attached to the exterior body 83.
  • the sliding bearing 90 is for sliding the shaft movement permission member 80 with respect to the mounting member 70.
  • the slide bearing 90 is disposed between the shaft portion 72 of the mounting member 70 and the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80. More specifically, the slide bearing 90 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is fitted into a stepped portion 81 d formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 81 in the shaft movement permission member 80. In this state, by attaching the inner peripheral surface of the slide bearing 90 to the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 72 of the mounting member 70 so as to be slidable, the shaft movement permission member 80 is axially (vertically) with respect to the mounting member 70. It is movable.
  • the sliding bearing 90 is a resin bush.
  • the plurality of positioning members 95 are for positioning the elastic member 94.
  • the plurality of positioning members 95 includes first to fourth positioning members 96, 97, 98, and 99.
  • the first positioning member 96 is an annular plate member and is attached to the annular groove 85 b of the cover member 85.
  • the pair of second positioning members 97 are disposed between a plurality of elastic members 94 described later.
  • one second positioning member 97a is formed in a cylindrical shape.
  • the second positioning member 97a is attached to the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85. More specifically, the second positioning member 97a is formed by fitting a concave portion formed in the second positioning member 97a to a convex portion (not shown) formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85, thereby Attached to the inner peripheral surface of the member 85.
  • the other second positioning member 97b is formed in a cylindrical shape.
  • the cylinder diameter of the other second positioning member 97b is smaller than the cylinder diameter of the second positioning member 97a.
  • the second positioning member 97b is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80.
  • the second positioning member 97a disposed on the cover member 85 side is referred to as a second positioning member on the outer peripheral side
  • the second positioning member 97b disposed on the tubular portion 81 side of the shaft movement permission member 80 is This is called an inner peripheral second positioning member.
  • the pair of third positioning members 98 includes an elastic member 94 (94b) disposed on the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 81, for example, on the annular groove portion 81a side of the cylindrical portion 81, and a stay mounting portion of the mounting member 70. 71.
  • one third positioning member 98a is formed in a cylindrical shape.
  • the one third positioning member 98 a is attached to the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85. More specifically, one third positioning member is formed by fitting a concave portion formed on one third positioning member 98a to a convex portion (not shown) formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85. 98 a is attached to the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85.
  • the other third positioning member 98b is formed in an annular shape.
  • the ring diameter of the other third positioning member 98b is smaller than the cylinder diameter of the one third positioning member 98a.
  • the other third positioning member 98 b is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80.
  • the other third positioning member 98 b is an axial movement permission member between the elastic member 94 (94 b) disposed on the annular groove 81 a side (lower end side) of the cylindrical portion 81 and the reference member 88. Attached to the outer peripheral surface of 80 cylindrical portions 81.
  • positioned at the cover member 85 side is called the 3rd positioning member of an outer peripheral side, and the 3rd positioning member 98 arrange
  • the fourth positioning member 99 is attached to the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 81.
  • the fourth positioning member 99 is formed in an annular shape and is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 81. More specifically, the fourth positioning member 99 is, for example, a C-type retaining ring, and is fitted into the annular groove portion 81 a of the tubular portion 81.
  • the reference member 88 is a member that serves as a reference when detecting the operation force in the vertical Z direction applied to the operation rod 15 in the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17.
  • the reference member 88 is in contact with an axial displacement detector 17a of an expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 described later.
  • the reference member 88 is formed in an annular shape.
  • the elastic member 94 is for absorbing a force (off-axis force) other than the axial direction with respect to the movable stay 50.
  • the elastic member 94 is composed of a plurality of elastic members, and the plurality of elastic members 94 are arranged between the cylindrical portion 81 and the exterior portion 82 at a predetermined interval in the axial direction.
  • the elastic member 94 is a spiral spring, for example, a plate-shaped spiral spring.
  • the plurality of elastic members 94 includes two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b.
  • the plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b are arranged at a predetermined interval in the axial direction, the plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b can generate a force in a direction intersecting the axial direction. The force at the time of moment generation can be absorbed reliably.
  • the two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b have the same shape, and are turned upside down and arranged between the tubular portion 81 and the exterior portion 82 at a predetermined interval in the axial direction.
  • Each of the two plate-like spiral springs 94 a and 94 b is disposed between the cylindrical portion 81 and the exterior portion 82 via the positioning member 95.
  • one (upper) plate-like spiral spring 94a has its outer peripheral edge clamped between the second positioning member 97a and the first positioning member 96 on the outer peripheral side.
  • one plate-like spiral spring 94 a has its inner peripheral edge clamped between the second positioning member 97 b on the inner peripheral side and the second flange 81 c of the axial movement permission member 80.
  • the other (lower) plate-like spiral spring 94b has its outer peripheral edge clamped between the outer peripheral second positioning member 97a and the outer peripheral third positioning member 98a.
  • the other plate-like spiral spring 94b has its inner peripheral edge sandwiched between the inner peripheral second positioning member 97b and the inner peripheral third positioning member 98b.
  • the outer peripheral portions of the two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b are positioned by the second positioning member 97a on the outer peripheral side and the third positioning member 98a on the outer peripheral side.
  • the inner peripheral portions of the two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b are positioned by an inner peripheral second positioning member 97b and an inner peripheral third positioning member 98b. Further, the axial movement of the inner peripheral portions of the two plate-like spiral springs 94 a and 94 b is restricted by the fourth positioning member 99 via the adjustment member 89 and the reference member 88.
  • the signal receiving unit 184 for identifying a signal unique to the attachment AT in a state where the attachment AT is attached to the attachment mounting unit 59 is included in the control unit 110.
  • the signal receiving unit 184 identifies a conduction pattern described later.
  • the attachment mounting portion 59 further includes a plurality of pin terminals 84a, and each pin terminal 84a corresponds to each of the plurality of contact terminals 159 described above. That is, the plurality of pin terminals 84a are provided in the attachment mounting portion 59 so that each pin terminal 84a and the contact terminal 159 corresponding to each pin terminal 84a can contact each other. Specifically, the plurality of pin terminals 84a, for example, 10 pin terminals are mounted on the terminal mounting member 84 so as to protrude outward from the upper surface of the terminal mounting member 84.
  • ten pin terminals 84 a arranged in two rows with five as one set are provided on the terminal mounting member 84. In this case, when the attachment AT is attached to the attachment attachment portion 59, the ten pin terminals 84a come into contact with the ten contact terminals 159 described above.
  • each of the two short-circuited contact terminals 159 and the pin terminal 84a that contacts each of the two contact terminals 159 are connected by a one-dot chain line.
  • a signal specific to the attachment AT corresponding to this conduction pattern is identified by the signal receiving unit 184.
  • the control part 110 determines the kind of attachment AT based on this signal. And the control part 110 starts an upper limb training program according to the kind of attachment AT determined based on the signal, and controls an upper limb training apparatus based on an upper limb training program.
  • the control unit 110 can automatically select the upper limb training program corresponding to the attachment AT.
  • the upper limb training apparatus 1 can reliably or automatically select the upper limb training program corresponding to the attachment AT. For this reason, the doctor and the occupational therapist can automatically execute the training program corresponding to the attachment AT only by attaching the attachment AT to the attachment mounting portion 59. Thereby, the patient can perform optimal upper limb training using the attachment AT selected by the doctor and occupational therapist.
  • the control unit 110 extracts several upper limb training programs corresponding to the type of the attachment AT and allows the user to select them, or automatically starts one upper limb training program. Since the upper limb training apparatus 1 is controlled, the doctor or occupational therapist can execute the training program corresponding to the attachment AT without mistake by simply attaching the attachment AT to the attachment attachment portion 59. Thereby, the patient can perform optimal upper limb training using the attachment AT selected by the doctor and occupational therapist.
  • the rod cover 48 includes a cover structure 65 including a plurality of (for example, three) cover elements that cover the expansion / contraction mechanism 47 and are fitted in a nested structure that expands / contracts with the expansion / contraction mechanism 47.
  • the cover element is fitted to the upper cover element 65a, the intermediate cover element 65b fitted to the inner peripheral side of the upper cover element 65a, and the inner peripheral surface of the intermediate cover element 65b.
  • a lower cover element 65c is fitted to the upper cover element 65a, the intermediate cover element 65b fitted to the inner peripheral side of the upper cover element 65a, and the inner peripheral surface of the intermediate cover element 65b.
  • the upper cover element 65 a is a cover element having the maximum diameter that is fixed to the upper end of the movable stay 50.
  • the intermediate cover element 65b is an intermediate diameter cover element that expands and contracts together with the upper cover element 65a.
  • the lower cover element 65c is a cover element having a minimum diameter that fits on the inner peripheral side of the intermediate cover element 65b.
  • a tapered surface 65d that increases in thickness from the lower end edge upward is formed.
  • the upper cover element 65a, the intermediate cover element 65b, and the lower cover element 65c have a structure that can be vertically divided into two as shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 19, and 20, respectively.
  • the divided upper cover element 65a is connected to the movable stay 50 by screws.
  • the divided intermediate cover element 65b is elastically connected to the upper cover element 65a in a suspended state.
  • the divided lower cover element 65 c is elastically connected to the fixed stay 49.
  • the upper outer peripheral surface of the intermediate cover element 65b is engaged with the inner peripheral surface of the lower end of the upper cover element 65a.
  • a first scale 66a and a second scale 66b for indicating the extension length of the operation rod 15 are written on the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cover element 65c and the intermediate cover element 65b.
  • the first scale 66a of “H1, H2, H3...” Is written on the lower cover element 65c
  • the second scale of “L0, L1, L2, L3.
  • a scale 66b is shown.
  • the upper cover element 65a has a circular cross section.
  • the intermediate cover element 65b shown in FIG. 19 and the lower cover element 65c shown in FIG. 20 are non-circular (oval shapes) in which the cross section is formed by linearly cutting the top and the left of the circle.
  • the lower cover element 65c has a shape in which the left and right sides are larger than the intermediate cover element 65b.
  • the stretch resistance imparting mechanism 16 has the Z-axis motor 61 described above.
  • the expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 drives the Z-axis motor 61 according to the expansion / contraction operation force detected by the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 to apply resistance to the expansion / contraction operation of the operation rod 15, and assists or forcibly moves.
  • the expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 also functions as an expansion / contraction drive unit that expands / contracts the operation rod 15 for the purpose of adjusting the training height.
  • the Z-axis motor 61 of the expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 is located below the plane supporting position of the movable frame 12, that is, the plane including the rotation axis X1 and the rotation axis Y1 of the first gimbal mechanism 30 (on the floor surface FL). It is placed in a close position. That is, in the telescopic drive unit, the rotation axis X2 and the rotation axis Y2 of the second gimbal mechanism 40 are also in the same vertical Z-direction position. It is arranged at a position close to the FL. As shown in FIG. 11, the Z-axis motor 61 is provided with a Z-axis rotary encoder 63 for detecting the position in the Z-axis direction.
  • the patient T tilts the operation rod 15 using, for example, the attachment AT using the upper limb.
  • the operating rod 15 tilts in a state where resistance is applied, assisted, or forcibly moved by the tilt resistance applying mechanism 13.
  • the upper limb of the patient T can be trained.
  • the Z-axis motor 61 having a relatively large mass for expanding and contracting the operation rod 15 is disposed at a position closer to the floor surface FL than the first tilt center C1 where the movable frame 12 tilts, that is, below, the upper limb training. Since the center of gravity of the apparatus 1 is lowered, the upper limb training apparatus 1 is difficult to fall even if the installation area of the training apparatus body 3 is small. Further, since the center of the moment generated by the tilting of the operating rod 15 can be brought close to the first tilting center C1, the mechanical load can be reduced.
  • the operation rod 15 is supported by the movable frame 12 so as to be tiltable in all directions from the second tilt center C2, and the expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 is disposed at a position closer to the floor surface FL than the second tilt center C2. ing.
  • the upper limb training apparatus 1 is more difficult to fall.
  • the 1st tilt center C1 and the 2nd tilt center C2 are arrange
  • the output shaft 61a of the Z-axis motor 61 extends along the extending / contracting direction of the operation rod 15, and the ball screw shaft 55 of the operation rod 15 is connected to the output shaft 61a by a coupling 62 so as to be concentric with the output shaft 61a. And can be rotated together. Thereby, the heavy object including the Z-axis motor 61 can be disposed only directly below the operation rod 15, and the planar dimension of the upper limb training apparatus 1 can be reduced.
  • the telescopic operating force detection mechanism 17 has an axial displacement detector 17a.
  • the shaft displacement detector 17 a detects the position of the shaft movement permission member 80 in the axial direction with respect to the mounting member 70.
  • the shaft displacement detector 17 a is disposed inside the operation rod 15 and is in contact with the reference member 88 of the mounting member 70.
  • the shaft displacement detector 17a includes a linear potentiometer.
  • the sensor head 17 b of the linear potentiometer is spring-biased and is always in contact with the lower surface of the reference member 88 fixed to the shaft movement permission member 80. More specifically, the sensor head 17b is set on the lower surface of the reference member 88 in a state where the sensor head 17b of the linear potentiometer 17a is contracted by a predetermined amount against the spring force of the coil spring disposed on the outer periphery of the sensor head 17b. Has been. The position of the sensor head 17b in this state is set to the initial position of the sensor head 17b.
  • the sensor head 17b expands and contracts in the axial direction following the movement in the axial direction. Then, the linear potentiometer 17a outputs a voltage value corresponding to the amount of movement of the sensor head 17b with respect to the input reference voltage. Based on this voltage value, a processor (not shown) such as a CPU calculates the amount of movement of the sensor head 17b relative to the initial position of the sensor head. In this way, the shaft displacement detector 17a detects the displacement of the operation rod 15 in the axial direction. The axial displacement of the operating rod 15 takes a positive value or a negative value with reference to the initial position.
  • the axial operation force applied to the operation rod 15 is calculated based on the axial displacement of the shaft movement permission member 80.
  • a processing unit such as a CPU, generates an axial operation force applied to the operation rod 15 based on a correspondence table of the axial displacement of the axial movement permission member 80 and the axial force corresponding to the axial displacement.
  • the correspondence table is set based on the rigidity of the plurality of elastic members 94, for example, the rigidity in the out-of-plane direction of the two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b.
  • the attachment to which the attachment AT is attached when the patient T places his / her hand or arm on the attachment AT or holds the attachment AT and operates the operation rod 15 in the axial direction, the attachment to which the attachment AT is attached.
  • the attachment portion 59 moves in the operation direction (up and down). Specifically, when a force component other than the axial direction is generated in the operating rod 15 when the patient T operates the operating rod 15 in the axial direction, the force component is absorbed by the elastic member 94. Then, the axial movement permission member 80 moves in the axial direction with respect to the mounting member 70 via the slide bearing 90 by the axial force generated in the operation rod 15.
  • the reference member 88 fixed to the shaft movement permission member 80 also moves in the axial direction at the same time, and the sensor head in contact with the reference member 88 expands and contracts. Then, the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 detects an axial force corresponding to the expansion / contraction amount of the sensor head, that is, an axial operation force applied to the operation rod 15.
  • the axial displacement detection unit 17a detects an axial displacement corresponding to the axial force applied to the operation rod 15.
  • the axial displacement detection unit 17 a absorbs the axial force acting on the operation rod 15 by the two plate-like spiral springs 94 a and 94 b while the axial displacement detection unit 17 a is in the axial direction. Since the displacement can be detected, the force acting only in the axial direction of the operating rod 15 can be accurately obtained.
  • the shaft displacement detector 17a is disposed inside the operation rod 15, unnecessary external force such as impact force does not directly act on the shaft displacement detector 17a. Thereby, only the displacement (axial displacement) of the measurement object of the axial displacement detector 17a can be measured more accurately.
  • the shaft displacement detector 17a is, for example, a linear potentiometer
  • the shaft of the shaft movement permission member 80 relative to the mounting member 70 is brought into contact with the shaft movement permission member 80 by bringing the sensor head 17b of the linear potentiometer 17a into contact with the shaft movement permission member 80.
  • the position in the direction can be detected more accurately.
  • the two plate-like spiral springs 94 a and 94 b are arranged in the axial direction between the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80 and the exterior portion 82 of the shaft movement permission member 80. Since they are arranged at a predetermined interval, it is possible to reliably absorb forces other than the axial direction that can directly act on the operating rod 15, forces other than the axial direction when a moment is generated, and the like.
  • the elastic member 94 that absorbs the force other than the axial direction acting on the operating rod 15 is the spiral springs 94a and 94b
  • the direction dependency when absorbing the force can be reduced.
  • plate-like spiral springs are used as the spiral springs 94a and 94b. Since the plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b can be formed by cutting out a thin metal plate, the outer peripheral portion and the central portion can be easily processed and can be processed with high accuracy. As a result, the direction dependency of the spiral springs 94a and 94b itself can be further reduced.
  • the shaft movement permission member 80 is The shaft moves smoothly with respect to the mounting member 70. Thereby, the displacement of the shaft movement permission member 80 with respect to the mounting member 70 can be measured more accurately.
  • the material of the slide bearing 90 is resin, even if the shape of the slide bearing 90 is a bush shape, the slide bearing 90 can be easily molded with a predetermined size.
  • the exterior cover 18 is a cover structure that covers internal mechanisms such as the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40 from above so as not to be exposed to the outside. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the exterior cover 18 is attached to the upper part of the main body cover 200 that covers the periphery of the lower part of the training apparatus main body 3 and covers the inside of the training apparatus main body 3 together with the main body cover 200. Thus, since the exterior cover 18 covers the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40, dust and dust are prevented from adhering to the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40. Further, it is possible to prevent a person from touching the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40 by mistake.
  • the exterior cover 18 includes a first moving cover 201, a second moving cover 202, a first driven cover 203, a second driven cover 204, and a fixed cover 205.
  • These covers are dome-shaped members made of synthetic resin, and are arranged so as to overlap from top to bottom in the above order.
  • the dome shape is a shape that becomes a part of a spherical surface.
  • the small-diameter opening edge is located above, the large-diameter opening edge is located below, and smooth from the small-diameter opening edge toward the large-diameter opening edge. This is a curved shape.
  • Each cover is movable relative to each other in the direction along the respective dome shape.
  • the outer diameter of the upper cover is larger than the inner diameter of the lower cover, so that the large-diameter opening edge of the upper cover is above the small-diameter opening edge of the lower cover. overlapping.
  • the first moving cover 201 is mainly composed of a dome-shaped portion 201a.
  • the first moving cover 201 is fixed to the operation rod 15 so as to move integrally with the operation rod 15.
  • the first moving cover 201 has a small-diameter opening edge 201 b fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the operation rod 15.
  • the 1st moving cover 201 is comprised from two members of a half crack.
  • the second moving cover 202 is mainly composed of a dome-shaped portion 202a.
  • the second moving cover 202 is fixed so as to move integrally with the movable frame 12, and is relatively movable between the first moving cover 201 and the fixed cover 205.
  • the second moving cover 202 is fixed to the second movable portion 32 of the movable frame 12. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 5 to 9, the second movable portion 32 is provided with a connecting frame 207 extending upward, and the second moving cover 202 is fixed to the upper end of the connecting frame 207. Yes. Specifically, as shown in FIG.
  • a cylindrical portion 202 c extends downward from the small-diameter opening edge 202 b of the second moving cover 202, and the cylindrical portion 202 c is connected to the connecting frame 207.
  • a gap S ⁇ b> 1 is secured between the lower surface of the dome-shaped portion 201 a of the first moving cover 201 and the upper surface of the dome-shaped portion 202 a of the second moving cover 202. According to this, since the first moving cover 201 and the second moving cover 202 are not in contact, when the first moving cover 201 and the second moving cover 202 move relative to each other, no frictional resistance is generated between them. . Therefore, the tilting operation force detection mechanism 14 can accurately detect the operation force applied to the operation rod 15 by the tilting operation of the patient T and the tilting operation vector indicating the direction of the operation force even with a small operation force. Since the second moving cover 202 is fixed to the movable frame 12, the strength of the cover structure is improved.
  • the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 include dome-shaped portions 203a and 204a, respectively.
  • the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 are disposed between the second moving cover 202 and the fixed cover 205.
  • the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 are not fixed to any of the fixed frame 11, the movable frame 12, and the operation rod 15.
  • the second moving cover 202 and the first driven cover 203 are in contact with each other, and the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 are in contact with each other. Therefore, when the second moving cover 202 moves relative to the fixed cover 205, the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 follow the movement.
  • the first driven cover 203 has a small-diameter opening edge 203b formed at the upper end thereof, a large-diameter opening edge formed at the lower end thereof, and the operation rod 15 is inserted through the small-diameter opening edge 203b and the large-diameter opening edge.
  • An annular downward projection 203c is formed extending downward from the small-diameter opening edge 203b.
  • the first driven cover 203 further has an annular protrusion 203d that extends downward from the large-diameter opening.
  • the protrusion 203 d is in contact with the upper surface of the second driven cover 204. With such a structure, a gap S ⁇ b> 2 is secured between the lower surface of the dome-shaped portion 203 a of the first driven cover 203 and the upper surface of the dome-shaped portion 204 a of the second driven cover 204.
  • the second driven cover 204 has a small-diameter opening edge 204b at its upper end, a large-diameter opening edge at its lower end, and the operation rod 15 is inserted through the small-diameter opening edge 204b and the large-diameter opening edge 204e.
  • the second driven cover 204 has an annular downward projection 204c extending downward from the small diameter opening edge 204b and an annular upward projection 204d extending upward from the small diameter opening edge 204b.
  • a tapered surface 204f On the upper surface of the large-diameter opening edge 204e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204, a tapered surface 204f whose thickness decreases downward is formed.
  • the fixed cover 205 mainly includes a dome-shaped portion 205a and has an opening edge 205b at the upper end thereof. Further, the fixed cover 205 has an outer peripheral flange 205c extending radially outward from the large-diameter opening edge of the dome-shaped portion 205a.
  • the exterior cover 18 covers the internal mechanisms such as the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40 from above so as not to be exposed to the outside regardless of the tilting degree of the operation rod 15.
  • the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 follow the movement of the second moving cover 202 as described above.
  • the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 are rubbed or collide with each other, such a phenomenon does not affect the tilting operation force detection mechanism 14. This is because the second moving cover 202 is fixed to the movable frame 12.
  • the circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 202a of the second moving cover 202 is substantially equal to the circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 203a of the first driven cover 203. Furthermore, the circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 204a of the second driven cover 204 is longer than the circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 202a of the second moving cover 202 and the dome-shaped portion 203a of the first driven cover 203, and is fixed. It is shorter than the circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 205a of the cover 205.
  • FIG. 22 a state where the covers are engaged with each other by moving in one direction will be described as shown in FIG. In FIG. 22, the second driven cover 204 is locked to the fixed cover 205, the first driven cover 203 is locked to the second driven cover 204, and the second moving cover 202 is locked to the first driven cover 203. ing. In this state, the large-diameter opening edge 204e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204 extends further downward than the large-diameter opening edges at the lower ends of the second moving cover 202 and the first driven cover 203.
  • a clearance S ⁇ b> 3 is secured between the large-diameter opening edge 204 e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204 and the outer peripheral flange 205 c of the fixed cover 205. That is, the large-diameter opening edge 204e of the second driven cover 204 does not fall to the bottom, so that it is difficult for a person to pinch a finger between the second driven cover 204 and the outer peripheral flange 205c of the fixed cover 205. .
  • the large-diameter opening edge 204e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204 is formed with a tapered surface 204f whose thickness decreases downward, so that the second driven cover 204 is inclined and the large-diameter opening at the lower end is inclined. Even when a part of the edge 204e moves to the lowermost position, a human finger is caught in the gap S3 between the large-diameter opening edge 204e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204 and the flat outer peripheral flange 205c of the fixed cover 205. Hateful.
  • the amount by which the operating rod 15 can tilt with respect to the movable frame 12 is set smaller than the amount by which the movable frame 12 can tilt with respect to the fixed frame 11.
  • the subordinate cover is disposed not between the first moving cover 201 and the second moving cover 202 but between the second moving cover 202 and the fixed cover 205.
  • the operating rod needs to move the subordinate cover when the operating rod is operated. Some resistance to the patient's operating force is generated, which is not preferable.
  • the chair 4 includes a chair body 511 and leg portions 512.
  • the chair body 511 has a seat 511a, a backrest 511b, and a shoulder rest 511c.
  • the leg portion 512 includes a column member 512a extending downward from the chair body 511, a plurality of legs 512b extending radially from the lower end of the column member 512a, and a caster 512c attached to the tip of the leg 512b.
  • the column member 512a is, for example, a hexagonal column, and is non-rotatably connected to other members at both upper and lower ends.
  • Each of the casters 512c is provided with a detent mechanism (not shown).
  • the chair 4 is further provided with a restraining tool 515 for restraining the patient T on the chair body 511.
  • the restraining tool 515 is a belt member such as a seat belt.
  • the patient T operates the operation rod 15 while sitting on the chair body 511 and being restrained by the restraint 515 to the chair body 511. Since the patient T is restrained by the chair main body 511, the position and orientation of the patient T do not change, so that the upper limb can be accurately trained.
  • connection mechanism 5 connects the chair 4 and the training apparatus main body 3 integrally.
  • the connection mechanism 5 enables the chair 4 to be moved between the right arm training position and the left arm training position while maintaining the state where the chair 4 is connected to the training apparatus main body 3 by the connection mechanism 5, and the right arm training position 321 and the left arm
  • the position is adjusted and fixed at the training position 322 (see FIG. 27).
  • “fixed” refers to a state in which the chair 4 cannot change the position with respect to the training apparatus main body 3 and the direction cannot be changed. Therefore, the chair 4 can be easily fixed at an appropriate position according to the training condition of the upper limb.
  • the chair 4 since the chair 4 is maintained in the state of being fixed to the training apparatus main body 3 by the connection mechanism 5, there is no problem that the chair 4 starts moving while the patient T operates the operation rod 15 of the training apparatus main body 3. Therefore, the upper limb of the patient T can be accurately trained.
  • the connecting mechanism 5 has a first arm 501 and a second arm 502.
  • the first end portion 501a of the first arm 501 and the first end portion 502a of the second arm 502 are rotatably connected by a first connecting portion 503.
  • the second end portion 501b of the first arm 501 and the training apparatus main body 3 are rotatably connected by a second connecting portion 504.
  • the second connecting portion 504 is fixed to a fixing portion 506 provided on the rear side (front side) in the front-rear X direction of the training apparatus main body 3.
  • the second end 502b of the second arm 502 and the chair 4 are rotatably connected by a third connecting portion 505.
  • a ring-shaped fixing member 507 is fixed to the third connecting portion 505.
  • the fixing member 507 is fixed to the column member 512a of the chair 4 so as not to rotate.
  • the portion 502b and the chair 4 are connected to each other by first to third connecting portions 503 to 505 so as to be rotatable and fixed. Therefore, the position and direction of the chair 4 with respect to the training apparatus main body 3 are determined by rotating the three places and adjusting the angular position.
  • the doctor or occupational therapist By indicating the relative angular position, the specific position and orientation of the chair 4 can be instructed. Then, the operator can accurately position the chair 4 by following the instructions.
  • connection mechanism 5 connects the chair 4 and the training apparatus main body 3 so that the chair 4 moves between the right arm training position and the left arm training position through the back (near side) of the training apparatus main body 3. In this case, the work for moving the chair 4 is easy, and the space for moving the chair 4 is reduced. In addition, since the 1st arm 501, the 2nd arm 502, and the 1st connection part 503 are arrange
  • FIG. 36 shows the positional relationship between the chair 4 and the training apparatus main body 3 when the chair 4 is placed at the right arm training position 321.
  • the coordinates at which the chair 4 should be fixed at the right arm training position 321 are illustrated with reference to the position of the operation rod 15 of the training apparatus body 3.
  • a plurality of black dots in the figure are coordinates at which the center of the column member 512a of the chair 4 may be arranged.
  • the 1st connection part 503, the 2nd connection part 504, and the 3rd connection part 505 are members which connect two types of members so that rotation is possible, and a basic structure is common.
  • the first connecting portion 503 mainly includes an upper first member 521, a lower second member 522, and a lock mechanism 523.
  • the first end portion 502a of the second arm 502 is fixed to the first member 521.
  • the first member 521 is a cup-shaped member, and is arranged with the convex side face upward.
  • the first member 521 has a curved portion 521a and a cylindrical first shaft 521b extending in the vertical direction at the center.
  • a central hole 521c extending in the axial direction is formed in the first shaft 521b.
  • the first end 502a of the second arm 502 passes through the bending portion 521a and is fixed to the first shaft 521b.
  • the first end 501a of the first arm 501 is fixed to the second member 522.
  • the second member 522 is a cup-shaped member, and is arranged with the convex side face downward.
  • the second member 522 has a curved portion 522a and a cylindrical second shaft 522b extending in the vertical direction at the center.
  • a center hole 522c extending in the axial direction is formed in the second shaft 522b of the second member 522.
  • the first end 501a of the first arm 501 passes through the bending portion 522a and is fixed to the second shaft 522b.
  • the second member 522 further has an annular flange 522d extending radially outward at the upper end.
  • the first member 521 is arranged in a state of being placed on the second member 522 and is rotatable with respect to the second member 522.
  • a thin triangular mark 531 is provided on the curved portion 521a of the first member 521, and a scale 532 is formed on the upper surface of the flange 522d of the second member 522 at a predetermined angular interval. Is provided. That is, the displacement angle of the first member 521 and the second member 522, that is, the angle formed by the first arm 501 and the second arm 502 can be determined depending on which number on the scale 532 the mark 531 indicates.
  • the lock mechanism 523 is a mechanism for connecting and releasing the first member 521 and the second member 522 so that they cannot rotate.
  • the lock mechanism 523 is disposed in a space defined by the first member 521 and the second member 522.
  • the lock mechanism 523 includes a rotation shaft 524, a first lock member 525, a second lock member 526, an anti-rotation member 527, and a knob 528.
  • the rotating shaft 524 extends through the center hole 521c of the first shaft 521b and the center hole 522c of the second shaft 522b.
  • the rotating shaft 524 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the first member 521 and the second member 522, and is supported so as not to be detached in the axial direction.
  • the threaded portion of the knob 528 is inserted through the end of the rotating shaft 524 on the first member 521 side.
  • the first lock member 525 is an annular or ring-shaped plate member fixed to the upper end portion of the second member 522.
  • the first lock member 525 has a plurality of first teeth 525a on the inner periphery.
  • the second lock member 526 is an annular plate-like member disposed below the first lock member 525.
  • the second lock member 526 has a plurality of second teeth 526a on the outer peripheral edge.
  • the second teeth 526a extend obliquely upward and can be engaged with the first teeth 525a of the first lock member 525.
  • the inner peripheral edge of the second lock member 526 is engaged with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating shaft 524 via the screw engaging portion 529.
  • the anti-rotation member 527 is a member for connecting the second lock member 526 to the first member 521 so as to be movable in the axial direction and non-rotatable.
  • the detent member 527 is an annular plate-like member disposed on the upper surface of the second lock member 526.
  • the outer diameter of the rotation prevention member 527 is smaller than the inner diameter of the first lock member 525, and therefore the rotation prevention member 527 and the first lock member 525 do not interfere with each other.
  • the detent member 527 is fixed to the second lock member 526.
  • the inner peripheral edge of the rotation prevention member 527 is engaged with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation shaft 524 via the rotation prevention portion 530.
  • the second lock member 526 and the rotation preventing member 527 move in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the second lock member 526 is movable between the lock position engaged with the first lock member 525 and the lock release position released from the first lock member 525. In FIG. 39, the second lock member 526 is in the unlocked position separated downward from the first lock member 525. When the second lock member 526 moves upward from this position, the second teeth 526a of the second lock member 526 engage with the first teeth 525a of the first lock member 525, and a locked state is established.
  • the first teeth 525a and the second teeth 526a are formed at a constant pitch. That is, the first connecting portion 503 allows the first member 521 and the second member 522 to be fixed at a position rotated by a certain pitch unit.
  • the first member is fixed to the first arm 501 and the second member is fixed to the fixing portion 506 of the training apparatus main body 3.
  • the first member is fixed to the second arm 502 and the second member is fixed to the fixing member 507.
  • the chair 4 can be moved within a predetermined training position range. Can be positioned freely within. Further, by setting the mark 531 to the target scale 532, the fixed position once set can be easily reproduced. For example, if the doctor tells the patient T in advance a set of numerical values that the mark 531 should point to at each connecting portion, the patient T may adjust each connecting portion so that the numbers are reproduced. Moreover, although said description is related to the position adjustment in the state which connected the chair 4 to the training apparatus main body 3, the chair 4 is disconnected from the training apparatus main body 3, and both members are carried to another place after that. This is also true when assembling.
  • the chair 4 is connected to the training apparatus main body 3 by the connecting mechanism 5 while the chair 4 is placed between the right arm training position 321 and the left arm training position 322. It can be moved between. At that time, the chair 4 can move in the left-right Y direction through the back (front) of the training apparatus body 3 in the front-rear X direction. Furthermore, if all the connecting portions 503 to 505 are tightened, the chair 4 is connected to the training apparatus body 3 with sufficient strength. As a result, the chair 4 does not move relative to the training apparatus body 3 during training. Further, the coupling mechanism 5 makes it difficult for the chair 4 or the training apparatus body 3 to fall.
  • the upper limb training apparatus 1 includes a remote control 541 and a remote control mounting seat 542 as shown in FIG.
  • the remote controller 541 is a device for the patient T to operate the training apparatus main body 3 with a healthy arm, for example.
  • the remote controller 541 and the training apparatus main body 3 are connected by wire or wirelessly.
  • the remote control mounting seat 542 can be mounted on the left and right sides of the chair 4.
  • the remote control mounting seats 542 may be mounted on both the left and right sides of the chair 4, but in reality, the remote control mounting seats 542 may be mounted on the opposite side of the patient T from the training arm. As a result, the patient T can operate the remote controller 541 with a healthy arm that has not been trained.
  • a hook-and-loop fastener (not shown) is attached to the upper surface of the remote control mounting seat 542 and the lower surface of the remote controller 541, and both are fixed by the hook-and-loop fastener. Therefore, the remote controller 541 is unlikely to drop off from the remote control mounting seat 542.
  • the remote controller 541 includes a housing 543, an emergency stop button 544, and operation buttons 545, 546, and 547 disposed in the recesses 543a, 543b, and 543c of the housing 543, respectively. is doing.
  • the emergency stop button 544 is provided on the housing 543 and is a member for instructing the training apparatus body 3 to perform an emergency stop. For example, when an abnormality occurs in the training apparatus main body 3, the patient T can perform an emergency stop of the training apparatus main body 3 by operating the remote controller 541 while sitting on the chair 4 during the training. Therefore, the safety of the upper limb training apparatus 1 is improved. Operations such as determination and cancellation are assigned to the operation buttons 545 to 547 by the training software.
  • the pressing surfaces of the operation buttons 545, 546, and 547 are inside the upper surface 543d of the housing 543 when not pressed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, the operation buttons 545, 546, and 547 are not visible when the remote controller 541 is viewed from the side. Therefore, even if the patient T accidentally drops the remote controller 541 on the floor surface FL, the operation buttons 545, 546, or 547 are unlikely to be accidentally pressed. That is, malfunction of the training apparatus body 3 is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the safety of the upper limb training apparatus 1 is improved.
  • the recesses 543a to 543c of the housing 543 have an annular tapered surface 543e inclined from the upper surface 543d of the housing 543 toward the center.
  • the operation buttons 545 to 547 can be pushed by sliding the finger along the tapered surface 543e. Therefore, the operability when the patient T operates the operation buttons 545 to 547 is good.
  • a cursor key 548 is provided between the operation buttons 545 to 547 and the emergency stop button 544. As shown in FIG. 41, the operation surface of the cursor key 548 protrudes from the upper surface 543d of the housing 543.
  • the cursor key 548 is used only for setting the operation, and is important for the training apparatus body 3. Therefore, there is no particular safety problem.
  • Monitor stand and monitor arm Corresponding to the chair 4 being placed at the right arm training position 321 or the left arm training position 322 with respect to the training apparatus main body 3 (see FIG. 27), the position where the patient T can easily see the monitor 7 A configuration to be moved to will be described.
  • This configuration mainly includes a monitor arm 301 that is attached to the monitor stand 6 and supports the monitor 7.
  • the monitor 7 is a thin display such as a liquid crystal display. Since the monitor stand 6, the monitor 7 and the monitor arm 301 are provided in an integral and inseparable manner with respect to the training apparatus body 3 (that is, not a separate apparatus), handling such as transportation is easy, Furthermore, positioning between the devices is easily and accurately performed.
  • the monitor stand 6 is a rod-shaped member extending upward from the base frame 21.
  • the monitor stand 6 is made of an aluminum frame, for example.
  • the monitor stand 6 is bent by a crank, and has a base end portion 6a fixed to the base frame 21 on the front side in the front-rear X direction with respect to the operation rod 15, and a curved portion 6b curved from the base end portion 6a to the front side in the front-rear X direction.
  • an upper end portion 6c provided with a monitor 7 located on the front side in the front-rear X direction from the base end portion 6a.
  • the upper end 6c extends linearly in the vertical Z direction.
  • the monitor stand 6 extends upward from the base end portion 6a, and the upper end portion 6c is disposed away from the operation rod 15 in the front-rear X direction front side, so that the installation area of the training apparatus body 3 is sufficiently small.
  • the monitor 7 is sufficiently disposed on the front side in the front-rear X direction.
  • the allowable value of the tilt angle when the operating rod 15 is tilted forward can be sufficiently increased. This is because the operation rod 15 or the attachment AT does not collide with the monitor 7 even if the operation rod 15 is tilted forward in the front-rear X direction.
  • the maximum movable range 320 in which the operation rod 15 is inclined and the attachment AT moves is a linear shape in which the front limit 320a in the front-rear X direction extends in the left-right Y direction in plan view. It is a D-shape.
  • the front limit 320a substantially coincides with the front end in the front-rear X direction of the training apparatus main body 3, but the monitor 7 is positioned further forward in the front-rear X direction than the front limit 320a.
  • the monitor arm 301 is provided on the monitor stand 6 and supports the monitor 7 so that the position of the monitor 7 can be adjusted on both sides in the left and right Y directions, and more specifically, it slides horizontally.
  • the monitor arm 301 includes a support member 302, a slide rail 303, a first support bracket 304, and a second support bracket 305.
  • the support member 302 supports the slide rail 303 in an accommodated state, and can move integrally with the slide rail 303 as will be described later.
  • the support member 302 includes a frame member 302a and a pair of rotating rollers 302b (described later) provided at both ends of the frame member 302a in the left-right Y direction.
  • the frame member 302a has an upper frame 302c and a lower frame 302d that is arranged to be spaced downward from the upper frame 302c.
  • the upper frame 302c and the lower frame 302d are connected to each other at portions that support the rotating roller 302b at both ends in the left-right Y direction.
  • the slide rail 303 extends in the left-right Y direction and is supported by the monitor stand 6 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction.
  • the slide rail 303 is a double-sided slide rail, and a first support bracket 304 is slidably mounted horizontally on the back surface in the front-rear X direction, and a second surface is mounted on the front surface in the front-rear X direction.
  • a support bracket 305 is slidably mounted in the horizontal direction.
  • the back surface of the monitor 7 is fixed to the first support bracket 304.
  • the second support bracket 305 is fixed to the upper end portion 6 c of the monitor stand 6.
  • the slide rail 303 has a frame 303a and rails 303b to 303e.
  • the frame 303a is a plate-like member having a predetermined width in the vertical Z direction and extending in the horizontal Y direction.
  • a second plate-like portion 303f extending forward in the front-rear X direction is provided.
  • a first rail 303b and a second rail 303c are fixed on the rear side in the front-rear X direction of the frame 303a so as to be aligned in the vertical Z direction.
  • the third rail 303d and the fourth rail 303e are fixed to the front side of the frame 303a in the front-rear X direction so as to be aligned in the vertical Z direction.
  • the rails 303b to 303e extend over the entire left and right Y direction of the frame 303a.
  • the upper frame 302c and the lower frame 302d of the frame member 302a are respectively arranged on both sides in the vertical Z direction of the frame 303a.
  • the upper frame 302c (and the lower frame 302d) has a first plate 302e having a predetermined width in the front-rear X direction and extending in the left-right Y direction, and a pair extending in the vertical Z direction from both sides in the front-rear X direction of the first plate 302e.
  • the first plate 302e is provided with a protrusion 302g having a predetermined width in the vertical Z direction and extending in the horizontal Y direction.
  • the protrusion 302g is in contact with the second plate-like portion 303f of the frame 303a from the vertical Z direction. In this way, the slide rail 303 is supported in the vertical direction by the support member 302.
  • the first support bracket 304 has a first bracket body 304a, and a first bearing mechanism 304b and a second bearing mechanism 304c fixed to the first bracket body 304a. As shown in FIG. 31, the first bearing mechanism 304b and the second bearing mechanism 304c are slidably disposed on the first rail 303b and the second rail 303c, respectively.
  • the second support bracket 305 includes a second bracket main body 305a, and a third bearing mechanism 305b and a fourth bearing mechanism 305c fixed to the second bracket main body 305a. As shown in FIG. 31, the third bearing mechanism 305b and the fourth bearing mechanism 305c are slidably disposed on the third rail 303d and the fourth rail 303e, respectively.
  • the slide rail 303 slides in the horizontal direction with respect to the monitor stand 6, and the monitor 7 moves in the horizontal direction with respect to the slide rail 303, so that the monitor can be performed while keeping the slide rail slide stroke small. 7 can be increased, and when the monitor 7 is moved to one side in the left-right Y direction, the amount of the slide rail 303 protruding from the monitor stand 6 to the opposite side in the left-right Y direction can be reduced.
  • the monitor 7 has moved to the left in the left-right Y direction, and in this case, the amount of the slide rail 303 and the support member 302 protruding from the monitor stand 6 further to the right in the left-right Y direction is small.
  • FIG. 32 the monitor 7 has moved to the left in the left-right Y direction, and in this case, the amount of the slide rail 303 and the support member 302 protruding from the monitor stand 6 further to the right in the left-right Y direction is small.
  • the monitor 7 is most moved to the right in the left-right Y direction, and the same effect can be obtained in this case.
  • 32 is used for training when the chair 4 is in the right arm training position 321 (see FIG. 27), and the position of the monitor 7 in FIG. 34 is the position when the chair 4 is in the left arm training position 322. Adopted for training.
  • the position of the monitor 7 can be adjusted by the monitor arm 301 on both sides in the left and right Y directions with respect to the monitor stand 6. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27, the monitor 7 is positioned in the left and right Y directions using the monitor arm 301 when the chair 4 is at the right arm training position 321 and when the chair 4 is at the left arm training position 322. 7 can be placed at a position that is easy for the patient T to see (for example, the front of the patient T). In particular, since the monitor arm 301 supports the monitor 7 so as to slide horizontally, an operation for moving the monitor 7 in the left-right Y direction is easy.
  • the operation of moving the monitor 7 in the left-right Y direction is merely sliding the monitor 7 in the left-right Y direction, that is, the work of removing and attaching the monitor 7 is not necessary. Therefore, in the upper limb training apparatus 1, the monitor 7 can be arranged at a position that is easy for the patient T to see by simple work.
  • the monitor arm 301 will be described in more detail.
  • the monitor arm 301 further has a belt 309.
  • the belt 309 has an endless shape and is wound around the rotating roller 302b of the support member 302.
  • the belt 309 has flexibility.
  • the belt 309 covers the entire length of the slide rail 303. Therefore, the operator is prevented from touching the slide rail 303 directly.
  • the first support bracket 304 and the second support bracket 305 are fixed to the belt 309, so that the first support bracket 304 and the slide rail 303 are interlocked in the left and right Y directions via the belt 309.
  • the first support bracket 304 and the second support bracket 305 are respectively fixed to the belt 309 so that the support member 302 and the slide rail 303 coincide with each other at the center in the left-right Y direction.
  • the belt 309 is disposed along the inside of the second plate 302f of the frame member 302a, and is disposed so as to cover the slide rail 303 together with the frame member 302a.
  • the width (length in the vertical Z direction) of the belt 309 is longer than the length between the edges of the upper and lower second plates 302f.
  • the belt 309 blocks the inside of the frame member 302a from the outside.
  • the belt 309 is driven in accordance with the movement of the first support bracket 304, and thereby the slide rail 303 is also moved to the same side.
  • cooperate, the movement of the monitor 7 can be performed by one operation
  • the amount by which the first support bracket 304 slides relative to the monitor stand 6 is twice the amount by which the slide rail 303 slides relative to the monitor stand 6, so that the first support bracket 304 and the monitor 7 move.
  • the speed is twice the moving speed of the slide rail 303. Therefore, when the monitor 7 is moved left and right, the monitor 7 can be quickly moved to a predetermined position.
  • the monitor arm 301 further includes a monitor moving handle 306, a rubber roller 307, and a torsion spring 308, as shown in FIG.
  • the monitor moving handle 306 is rotatably attached to the first support bracket 304 or the monitor 7. Specifically, it is supported by a pair of frames 304 d extending from the first support bracket 304.
  • the monitor moving handle 306 has an extension part 306a extending in the left-right Y direction and a pair of handle parts 306b extending by being bent at right angles from both ends of the extension part 306a.
  • the extension 306a is inserted into holes 304e formed in the pair of frames 304d of the first support bracket 304.
  • the rubber roller 307 is fixed to the monitor moving handle 306. Specifically, the rubber roller 307 is fixed to a cam bracket 313 attached to an extension 306 a of the monitor moving handle 306.
  • the rubber roller 307 is a columnar member made of a material having a high friction coefficient (for example, having a silicon rubber surface layer), and extends in the left-right Y direction.
  • the torsion spring 308 urges the monitor moving handle 306 so that the rubber roller 307 contacts the lower surface of the lower frame member 302a of the support member 302.
  • the torsion spring 308 is attached to the frame 304d.
  • the torsion spring 308 has a direction in which the rubber roller 307 comes into contact with the lower surface of the lower frame member 302a with the monitor moving handle 306 centering on the axial center Q extending in the left-right Y direction of the extension 306a ( An elastic force is applied so as to rotate clockwise in FIG.
  • the rubber roller 307 is pressed against the lower surface of the lower frame 302d of the frame member 302a of the support member 302.
  • the first support bracket 304 is immovable with respect to the support member 302 and the slide rail 303. Further, since the first support bracket 304 is interlocked with the slide rail 303, the slide rail 303 is also immovable with respect to the monitor stand 6. In the state where the above-described movement of the monitor 7 in the left-right Y direction is prevented, as shown in FIG. 35, the handle portion 306b of the monitor moving handle 306 extends downward.
  • the rubber roller 307 moves away from the support member 302 and the first support bracket 304 can move relative to the slide rail 303. Become. That is, the operator can move the first support bracket 304 and the monitor 7 in the left and right Y directions as they are while holding the monitor moving handle 306 and moving the first support bracket 304.
  • the monitor moving handle 306 since the monitor moving handle 306 has handle portions 306b on both sides in the left-right direction, the operator can easily monitor the monitor 7 regardless of which side it is in the left-right Y direction.
  • the moving handle 306 can be operated.
  • a carrying handle 310 for carrying the upper limb training apparatus 1 is fixed to the monitor stand 6.
  • the carrying handle 310 is attached to the upper end portion 6 c of the monitor stand 6.
  • the carrying handle 310 includes a fixed portion 310a and a pair of handle portions 310b extending from the fixed portion 310a to both sides in the left-right Y direction.
  • the carrying handle 310 is conspicuous and has an easy-to-use position and shape, so that the operator naturally holds the carrying handle 310 when carrying the upper limb training apparatus 1. That is, it is difficult for the operator to hold the monitor 7 or the monitor arm 301 for transportation. From the above, the upper limb training apparatus 1 is not easily damaged by external force.
  • the slide rail 303 is supported by the monitor stand 6 so as to be movable in the vertical Z direction.
  • the second support bracket 305 is fixed to the monitor stand 6 by the lock mechanism 311 and moves in the vertical Z direction within the range of the upper end portion 6c with respect to the monitor stand 6 when the lock mechanism 311 is released. It becomes possible.
  • the lock mechanism 311 has a spring (not shown) and is normally locked by the urging force of the spring. When a person releases the urging force, the monitor arm 301 can move up and down with respect to the monitor stand 6. Thereby, the monitor 7 can be adjusted to the height position of the face of the patient T.
  • the use of the upper limb training apparatus according to the present invention is not limited to this.
  • it can also be used for training to improve the function of the upper limbs, that is, to strengthen the muscles of the upper limbs.
  • B In the above-described embodiment, an example in which ten pin terminals 84a and ten contact terminals 159 are in contact with each other is shown.
  • the number of pin terminals 84a and the number of contact terminals 159 are plural and the same number. Any number may be set as long as it is.
  • the present invention can be widely used as an upper limb training apparatus used for training such as functional recovery of upper limbs and muscle strength enhancement of upper limbs.

Abstract

An upper limb exercising device (1) is provided with a secure frame (11), a movable frame (12), an operation rod (15), and a control unit (110). The secure frame (11) can be disposed on the floor (FL). The movable frame (12) is supported by the secure frame (11) so as to be able to tilt in all directions. The operation rod (15) is attached to the movable frame (12) and is operated by the hand of a person (T) exercising. The operation rod (15) is provided with an operation rod main body (57) and an attachment attaching unit (59). The attachment attaching unit (59) is attached to the tip of the operation rod main body (57). The control unit (110) has a signal receiving unit (184). The signal receiving unit (184) identifies a signal that is inherent in an attachment (AT) while the attachment (AT) is attached to the attachment attaching unit (59).

Description

上肢訓練装置Upper limb training device
 本発明は、訓練装置、特に、人間の上肢を訓練可能な上肢訓練装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a training apparatus, and more particularly to an upper limb training apparatus capable of training a human upper limb.
 脳血管障害及び脊椎損傷等の障害のために、上肢(特に、腕)の運動機能が損なわれた患者に対して回復訓練を行うための上肢訓練装置が従来知られている(特許文献1参照)。従来の上肢訓練装置は、フレームと、操作ロッドと、伸縮駆動部と、を備えている。フレームは、床面に配置可能な固定フレームと、固定フレームに対して傾動する可動フレームとを有している。可動フレームは、固定フレームに傾動中心から全方向に支持されている。操作ロッドは、可動フレームに傾動可能に連結されている。操作ロッドは上下に伸縮自在である。可動フレームは、電動駆動により傾動可能である。操作ロッドは、中間部に配置された伸縮駆動部により伸縮駆動される。操作ロッドの上端部には、訓練に応じたアタッチメントが着脱可能に装着されている。
 従来の上肢訓練装置では、患者は、不自由な腕で操作ロッドの頂部に取り付けたアタッチメントを握って又は腕をアタッチメントに固定して、腕で操作ロッドを動かす又は動かそうとする、或いは操作ロッドにより動かされて回復訓練を行う。
 医師及び作業療法士は、行う訓練の目的、患者の身長、肩の高さ、不自由な腕の可動範囲及び/又はアタッチメントの種類等を総合的に判断して、操作ロッドの長さを適切に設定する。操作ロッドは患者に応じてロッド長さが設定されるが、患者によっては操作ロッドを伸縮方向に動作させて機能回復訓練を行うこともある。
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, an upper limb training apparatus for performing recovery training for a patient whose upper limb (particularly, arm) motor function has been impaired due to a cerebrovascular disorder or spinal cord injury (see Patent Document 1). ). The conventional upper limb training apparatus includes a frame, an operation rod, and an extension / contraction drive unit. The frame includes a fixed frame that can be disposed on the floor surface and a movable frame that tilts with respect to the fixed frame. The movable frame is supported by the fixed frame in all directions from the tilt center. The operation rod is connected to the movable frame so as to be tiltable. The operating rod can be expanded and contracted vertically. The movable frame can be tilted by electric drive. The operation rod is driven to extend / contract by an extension / contraction drive unit disposed in the middle part. An attachment according to training is detachably attached to the upper end of the operation rod.
In the conventional upper limb training apparatus, the patient grasps the attachment attached to the top of the operation rod with the handicapped arm or fixes the arm to the attachment, and moves or tries to move the operation rod with the arm. It is moved by to perform recovery training.
Doctors and occupational therapists should appropriately determine the length of the operating rod by comprehensively judging the purpose of the training to be performed, the height of the patient, the height of the shoulder, the range of movement of the disabled arm and / or the type of attachment, etc. Set to. The rod length of the operation rod is set according to the patient, but depending on the patient, the function recovery training may be performed by operating the operation rod in the extension / contraction direction.
特開2007-50249号公報JP 2007-50249 A 米国特許出願公開第2006/0293617号明細書US Patent Application Publication No. 2006/0293617
 従来の上肢訓練装置を用いる場合、医師及び作業療法士は、様々な種類のアタッチメントの中から、各患者の訓練に最適なアタッチメントを選択する。また、医師及び作業療法士は、ここで選択されたアタッチメントの種類に応じて、上肢訓練プログラムを選択する。一般的には、各アタッチメントに対応する上肢訓練プログラムが用意されており、医師及び作業療法士は、アタッチメントを選択すると、このアタッチメントに対応する上肢訓練プログラムを、手動で選択する。ここで、医師及び作業療法士が、アタッチメントに対応する上肢訓練プログラムを間違って選択してしまうと、患者が上肢訓練装置を用いて訓練を行ったとしても、十分な上肢回復効果を得ることができない。 When using a conventional upper limb training apparatus, doctors and occupational therapists select the most suitable attachment for training each patient from various types of attachments. The doctor and occupational therapist select the upper limb training program according to the type of attachment selected here. In general, an upper limb training program corresponding to each attachment is prepared, and when a doctor and an occupational therapist select an attachment, the upper limb training program corresponding to this attachment is manually selected. Here, if the doctor and occupational therapist mistakenly select the upper limb training program corresponding to the attachment, even if the patient performs training using the upper limb training apparatus, a sufficient upper limb recovery effect can be obtained. Can not.
 本発明の課題は、上肢訓練装置において、付属品(アタッチメント)に対応した上肢訓練プログラムを確実に選択できるようにすることにある。 An object of the present invention is to enable an upper limb training apparatus to reliably select an upper limb training program corresponding to an accessory (attachment).
 以下に、課題を解決するための手段として複数の態様を説明する。これら態様は、必要に応じて任意に組み合せることができる。
 本発明の一見地に係る上肢訓練装置は、訓練を受ける人の上肢を訓練可能な上肢訓練装置である。上肢訓練装置は、固定フレームと、可動フレームと、操作ロッドと、制御部とを、備えている。固定フレームは、床面上に配置可能になっている。可動フレームは、全方向に傾動可能に固定フレームに支持されている。操作ロッドは、可動フレームに装着され、訓練を受ける人によって手で操作される。操作ロッドは、操作ロッド本体と、付属品取付部とを有している。付属品取付部は、付属品を取り付けるためのものであり、操作ロッド本体の先端部に装着されている。制御部は、可動フレームの傾倒動作を制御する。制御部は、信号受信部を有している。信号受信部は、付属品が付属品取付部に装着された状態で、付属品に固有である信号を、識別する。
Hereinafter, a plurality of modes will be described as means for solving the problems. These aspects can be arbitrarily combined as necessary.
The upper limb training apparatus according to an aspect of the present invention is an upper limb training apparatus capable of training an upper limb of a person receiving training. The upper limb training apparatus includes a fixed frame, a movable frame, an operation rod, and a control unit. The fixed frame can be arranged on the floor surface. The movable frame is supported by the fixed frame so as to be tiltable in all directions. The operating rod is attached to the movable frame and is manually operated by a trainee. The operation rod has an operation rod main body and an accessory mounting portion. The accessory attachment portion is for attaching an accessory, and is attached to the distal end portion of the operation rod body. The control unit controls the tilting operation of the movable frame. The control unit has a signal receiving unit. The signal receiving unit identifies a signal unique to the accessory in a state where the accessory is mounted on the accessory mounting unit.
 本上肢訓練装置では、付属品が付属品取付部に装着されると、付属品の信号受信部が、付属品に固有の信号を、識別する。この信号によって、付属品取付部に装着された付属品を識別できる。ここで付属品取付部に装着された付属品さえ識別することができれば、付属品に対応する上肢訓練プログラムは自動的に選択できる。このように、本上肢訓練装置では、付属品に対応した上肢訓練プログラムを確実に選択できる。 In this upper limb training apparatus, when an accessory is attached to the accessory mounting part, the signal receiving part of the accessory identifies a signal unique to the accessory. By this signal, it is possible to identify the accessory attached to the accessory mounting portion. Here, if even the accessory mounted on the accessory mounting portion can be identified, the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory can be automatically selected. Thus, in this upper limb training apparatus, the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory can be selected reliably.
 本上肢訓練装置では、制御部が、付属品から受信した信号に基づいて、付属品の種類を判定する。ここで、付属品から受信した信号は、付属品に固有の信号であるので、この信号に基づいて、制御部は付属品の種類を確実に判定できる。これにより、付属品に対応した上肢訓練プログラムを確実に判定できる。 In the upper limb training apparatus, the control unit determines the type of accessory based on the signal received from the accessory. Here, since the signal received from the accessory is a signal specific to the accessory, the control unit can reliably determine the type of the accessory based on this signal. Thereby, the upper limb training program corresponding to an accessory can be determined reliably.
 制御部は、付属品に固有の信号に基づいて判定した付属品の種類に応じて、上肢訓練プログラムを起動し、上肢訓練プログラムに基づいて、上肢訓練装置を制御するようにしてもよい。この場合、制御部が、付属品の種類に応じて上肢訓練プログラムを起動し、上肢訓練装置を制御するので、医師及び作業療法士は、付属品を付属品取付部に装着するだけで、付属品に対応する訓練プログラムを自動的に実行できる。これにより、医師及び作業療法士によって選択された付属品を用いた最適な上肢訓練を、患者は実行できる。
 付属品と付属品取付部の双方に電気接点を設け、付属品を付属品取付部に装着したときに有線で信号を送受信するようにしてもよい。この場合、付属品を付属品取付部に装着したときに、電気接点を介して、有線で信号を送受信することができるので、付属品に固有の信号を制御部は確実に識別することができる。これにより、付属品に対応した上肢訓練プログラムを確実に判定できる。
The control unit may activate the upper limb training program according to the type of accessory determined based on the signal unique to the accessory, and may control the upper limb training apparatus based on the upper limb training program. In this case, the control unit starts the upper limb training program according to the type of accessory and controls the upper limb training device, so doctors and occupational therapists simply attach the accessory to the accessory mounting part. The training program corresponding to the product can be automatically executed. This allows the patient to perform optimal upper limb training using accessories selected by the physician and occupational therapist.
An electrical contact may be provided on both the accessory and the accessory mounting part, and when the accessory is mounted on the accessory mounting part, signals may be transmitted and received by wire. In this case, when the accessory is mounted on the accessory mounting part, signals can be transmitted and received via the electrical contacts, so that the control unit can reliably identify the signal specific to the accessory. . Thereby, the upper limb training program corresponding to an accessory can be determined reliably.
 付属品取付部は、付属品取付部の上面から外方に突出する複数の突出端子を、有するようにしてもよい。この場合、付属品は、複数の接点端子を有している。各接点端子は、複数の突出端子それぞれに対応している。また、複数の接点端子のうち所定の2つの接点端子は、短絡している。
 本上肢訓練装置では、付属品が付属品取付部に装着されたときに、短絡した所定の2つの接点端子と、所定の2つの接点端子それぞれに対応した突出端子との間が導通する。すると、制御部は、導通パターンに応じた付属品の種類を判定する。
The accessory mounting portion may have a plurality of protruding terminals that protrude outward from the upper surface of the accessory mounting portion. In this case, the accessory has a plurality of contact terminals. Each contact terminal corresponds to each of a plurality of protruding terminals. In addition, two predetermined contact terminals among the plurality of contact terminals are short-circuited.
In the upper limb training apparatus, when the accessory is mounted on the accessory mounting portion, the predetermined two contact terminals that are short-circuited and the protruding terminals corresponding to the two predetermined contact terminals are electrically connected. Then, a control part determines the kind of accessory according to a conduction pattern.
 このように、本上肢訓練装置では、各付属品において2つの接点端子を短絡させるパターンが異なるように設定することによって、付属品が付属品取付部に装着されたときに、付属品に固有の信号を制御部は識別することができる。これにより、医師及び作業療法士は、付属品を付属品取付部に装着するだけで、付属品に対応する上肢訓練プログラムを自動的に選択できる。このように、本上肢訓練装置では、付属品に対応した上肢訓練プログラムを確実に選択できる。 As described above, in this upper limb training apparatus, when the accessory is mounted on the accessory mounting portion by setting different patterns for short-circuiting the two contact terminals in each accessory, the accessory is specific to the accessory. The control unit can identify the signal. Thus, the doctor and the occupational therapist can automatically select the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory simply by attaching the accessory to the accessory mounting portion. Thus, in this upper limb training apparatus, the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory can be selected reliably.
 本発明に係る上肢訓練装置では、付属品に対応した上肢訓練プログラムを確実に選択できる。 In the upper limb training apparatus according to the present invention, the upper limb training program corresponding to the accessory can be reliably selected.
本発明の一実施形態としての上肢訓練装置の斜視図。The perspective view of the upper limb training apparatus as one embodiment of the present invention. 上肢訓練装置の斜視図。The perspective view of an upper limb training apparatus. 訓練装置本体の概略断面図。The schematic sectional drawing of a training device main part. 訓練装置本体の概略断面図。The schematic sectional drawing of a training device main part. 訓練装置本体の内部の斜視図。The perspective view inside a training device main part. 訓練装置本体の断面図。Sectional drawing of a training apparatus main body. 訓練装置本体の内部の斜視図。The perspective view inside a training device main part. 訓練装置本体の内部の斜視図。The perspective view inside a training device main part. 傾動操作力検出機構の斜視図。The perspective view of a tilting operation force detection mechanism. 負荷部材の分解斜視図。The exploded perspective view of a load member. 操作ロッドの縦断面図。The longitudinal cross-sectional view of an operation rod. 操作ロッドの斜視図。The perspective view of an operation rod. 可動ステイの斜視図。The perspective view of a movable stay. 可動ステイの下部斜視図。The lower perspective view of a movable stay. ロッドカバーを付けた操作ロッドの伸長時の斜視図。The perspective view at the time of the expansion | extension of the operation rod which attached the rod cover. ロッドカバーを付けた操作ロッドの収縮時の斜視図。The perspective view at the time of contraction of the operating rod which attached the rod cover. ロッドカバーの伸長時の斜視図。The perspective view at the time of expansion | extension of a rod cover. 上カバー要素の平面図。The top view of an upper cover element. 中間カバー要素の平面図。The top view of an intermediate | middle cover element. 下カバー要素の平面図。The top view of a lower cover element. 外装フレームの部分断面図。The fragmentary sectional view of an exterior frame. 外装フレームの部分断面図。The fragmentary sectional view of an exterior frame. アタッチメント取付部の斜視図。The perspective view of an attachment attachment part. アタッチメント取付部の断面斜視図。The cross-sectional perspective view of an attachment attachment part. 制御構成ブロック図。FIG. 傾き検出制御フローチャート。The inclination detection control flowchart. 上肢訓練装置の概略平面図。The schematic plan view of an upper limb training apparatus. 上肢訓練装置の概略側面図。The schematic side view of an upper limb training apparatus. 上肢訓練装置の概略背面図。The schematic rear view of an upper limb training apparatus. 上肢訓練装置の概略正面図。The schematic front view of an upper limb training apparatus. モニタアームの一部断面を含む斜視図。The perspective view containing the partial cross section of a monitor arm. モニタ、モニタアーム及びモニタロッドの位置関係を説明するための概略平面図。The schematic plan view for demonstrating the positional relationship of a monitor, a monitor arm, and a monitor rod. モニタ、モニタアーム及びモニタロッドの位置関係を説明するための概略平面図。The schematic plan view for demonstrating the positional relationship of a monitor, a monitor arm, and a monitor rod. モニタ、モニタアーム及びモニタロッドの位置関係を説明するための概略平面図。The schematic plan view for demonstrating the positional relationship of a monitor, a monitor arm, and a monitor rod. モニタアームの側面図。The side view of a monitor arm. 上肢訓練装置の平面図。The top view of an upper limb training apparatus. 連結具の斜視図。The perspective view of a coupling tool. 連結部の斜視図。The perspective view of a connection part. 連結部の断面図。Sectional drawing of a connection part. リモコンの斜視図。The perspective view of a remote control. リモコンの側面図。The side view of a remote control.
(1)全体構成
 図1及び図2において、本発明の一実施形態による上肢訓練装置1は、脳血管障害及び脊椎損傷等の障害のために、上肢(特に、腕)の運動機能が損なわれた患者Tに対して上肢の回復訓練を行うための上肢運動機能回復支援を行う機能を有している。
 上肢訓練装置1は、訓練装置本体3と、椅子4と、訓練装置本体3と椅子4とを連結する連結機構5と、訓練装置本体3に固定されモニタ7が固定されるモニタスタンド6と、を備えている。なお、以降の説明において、前後方向とは図1のX方向であり、左右方向とは図1のY方向であり、上下方向とは図1のZ方向である。本明細書中では、椅子4に座る患者Tの視点において前後左右の方向を定義し、前方を奥側、後方を手前側と表す場合がある。ただし、後述するように、操作ロッド15は傾動するため、ここでは、操作ロッド15が床面に対して垂直上方に向いているときの方向をZ方向と定義し、Z方向に垂直な平面上にX方向及びY方向は定義される。
(1) Overall Configuration In FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the upper limb training apparatus 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention has impaired motor function of the upper limb (particularly the arm) due to cerebrovascular disorders and spinal cord injury. It has a function to support recovery of upper limb motor function to perform recovery training of the upper limb for the patient T.
The upper limb training apparatus 1 includes a training apparatus main body 3, a chair 4, a connection mechanism 5 that connects the training apparatus main body 3 and the chair 4, a monitor stand 6 that is fixed to the training apparatus main body 3 and the monitor 7 is fixed, It has. In the following description, the front-rear direction is the X direction in FIG. 1, the left-right direction is the Y direction in FIG. 1, and the up-down direction is the Z direction in FIG. In this specification, in the viewpoint of the patient T sitting on the chair 4, the front-rear and left-right directions are defined, and the front may be represented as the back side and the rear as the front side. However, since the operation rod 15 tilts as will be described later, here, the direction when the operation rod 15 is oriented vertically upward with respect to the floor surface is defined as the Z direction, and on the plane perpendicular to the Z direction. X direction and Y direction are defined.
(2)訓練装置本体
 訓練装置本体3は、図3及び図4に示すように、固定フレーム11及び可動フレーム12を有するフレーム10と、傾動抵抗付与機構13と、傾動操作力検出機構14と、操作ロッド15と、伸縮抵抗付与機構16と、伸縮操作力検出機構17と、外装カバー18と、を備えている。固定フレーム11は、床面FLに配置可能である。可動フレーム12は、第1傾動中心C1から前後X方向及び左右Y方向を含む全方向で傾動可能に固定フレーム11に支持されている。
(2) Training apparatus body As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the training apparatus body 3 includes a frame 10 having a fixed frame 11 and a movable frame 12, a tilting resistance applying mechanism 13, a tilting operation force detecting mechanism 14, and An operation rod 15, an expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16, an expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17, and an exterior cover 18 are provided. The fixed frame 11 can be arranged on the floor surface FL. The movable frame 12 is supported by the fixed frame 11 so as to be tiltable in all directions including the front-rear X direction and the left-right Y direction from the first tilt center C1.
 傾動抵抗付与機構13は、図3~図8に示すように、患者Tが操作ロッド15を傾動操作する際に患者Tに応じた適切な抵抗を付与し、或いは操作ロッド15を第1傾動中心C1に前後左右にピボット動作させて患者Tによる操作ロッド15の傾動操作を支援し又は患者Tによる腕の前後左右動さを誘導する機構である。傾動操作力検出機構14は、患者Tの傾動操作により操作ロッド15に加わる操作力及び操作力の方向を示す傾動操作ベクトルを検出するための機構である。操作ロッド15は、患者Tが上肢の機能回復訓練のために操作するロッドである。操作ロッド15は、可動フレーム12に装着され、上下Z方向に伸縮可能である。傾動操作力検出機構14は、患者Tによる操作ロッド15の可動フレーム12に対する変位量を検出するための機構である。伸縮抵抗付与機構16は、患者Tが操作ロッド15を伸縮操作する際に患者Tに応じた適切な抵抗を付与し、或いは操作ロッド15を伸縮させて患者Tによる操作ロッド15の伸縮操作を支援し又は患者Tによる腕の上下動作を誘導する機構である。また、伸縮抵抗付与機構16は、患者Tに応じて操作ロッド15の上下位置を調整する際に操作ロッド15を伸縮駆動する伸縮駆動部としても機能する。伸縮操作力検出機構17は、患者Tの腕の上下動作により操作ロッド15に加わる上下Z方向の操作力を検出するための機構である。外装カバー18は、固定フレーム11及び可動フレーム12の周囲を覆うカバーである。 As shown in FIGS. 3 to 8, the tilting resistance applying mechanism 13 applies an appropriate resistance according to the patient T when the patient T tilts the operating rod 15, or the operating rod 15 is moved to the first tilting center. This is a mechanism for assisting the tilting operation of the operation rod 15 by the patient T by guiding the C1 to pivot back and forth and to the left and right or guiding the arm T by the patient T. The tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 is a mechanism for detecting an operation force applied to the operation rod 15 by the tilt operation of the patient T and a tilt operation vector indicating the direction of the operation force. The operation rod 15 is a rod operated by the patient T for functional recovery training of the upper limbs. The operating rod 15 is attached to the movable frame 12 and can be expanded and contracted in the vertical Z direction. The tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 is a mechanism for detecting a displacement amount of the operation rod 15 relative to the movable frame 12 by the patient T. The expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 provides an appropriate resistance corresponding to the patient T when the patient T performs the expansion / contraction operation of the operation rod 15, or supports the expansion / contraction operation of the operation rod 15 by the patient T by extending / contracting the operation rod 15. Or a mechanism for guiding the vertical movement of the arm by the patient T. The expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 also functions as an expansion / contraction drive unit that drives the operation rod 15 to expand and contract when the vertical position of the operation rod 15 is adjusted according to the patient T. The expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 is a mechanism for detecting the operation force in the vertical Z direction applied to the operation rod 15 by the vertical movement of the patient's T arm. The exterior cover 18 is a cover that covers the periphery of the fixed frame 11 and the movable frame 12.
(2-1)固定フレーム
 固定フレーム11は、図3及び図5に示すように、床面FLを移動可能又は床面FLに固定設置可能なベースフレーム21と、ベースフレーム21上面に立ち上がり固定された第1支持ブラケット22及び第2支持ブラケット23と、を有している。ベースフレーム21は、後部(図5の右下端部)が概ね半円形の板状のフレームである。ベースフレーム21の後部下面には、キャスタ付きの自在車輪21aが一つ配置され、前部下面には左右方向に間隔を隔てて配置された一対の固定車輪21bが配置されている。また、ベースフレーム21の前後方向の中央部の両側には、訓練装置本体3を床面FL上に移動不能に配置するための、固定用の一対のアジャスタ21cが配置されている。ベースフレーム21の前部中央には、モニタスタンド6の下端が固定されるスタンド固定部21dが配置されている。また、ベースフレーム21の前部上方には、スタンド支持板25がスタンド固定部21dに平行で左右方向に延びて配置されている。スタンド支持板25は、左右端がベースフレーム21に立ち上がり固定された一対の固定ブラケット26により固定されている。
 図3に示すように、スタンド支持板25は、中央部にモニタスタンド6の基端部6aを回転不能に支持するスタンド支持孔25aを有している。さらに、モニタスタンド6の基端部6aの先端は、ベースフレーム21のスタンド固定部21dに形成された孔(図示せず)に回転不能に固定されている。このように、モニタスタンド6の基端部6aがベースフレーム21とスタンド支持板25によって上下2箇所で移動不能に支持されているため、モニタスタンドは半径方向にも傾き方向にも変位し難い。したがって、モニタスタンド6に外力が作用してベースフレーム21に対して傾こうとしても、モニタスタンド6のベースフレーム21に対する姿勢は堅く維持される。つまり、モニタスタンド6の取り付け強度が高くなっており、モニタスタンド6が取り付け部分に対してぐらつくような不具合が生じにくい。なお、後述するようにモニタスタンド6はキャリーハンドルの一部としても機能しているので、上述のように取り付け強度が向上していることは重要である。
(2-1) Fixed Frame As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, the fixed frame 11 is fixed to the base frame 21 that can move the floor surface FL or can be fixedly installed on the floor surface FL. And a first support bracket 22 and a second support bracket 23. The base frame 21 is a plate-like frame having a substantially semicircular rear portion (the lower right end portion in FIG. 5). One free wheel 21a with casters is arranged on the lower surface of the rear part of the base frame 21, and a pair of fixed wheels 21b arranged at intervals in the left-right direction are arranged on the lower surface of the front part. In addition, a pair of fixing adjusters 21c for disposing the training apparatus main body 3 so as to be immovable on the floor surface FL are disposed on both sides of the center portion in the front-rear direction of the base frame 21. In the center of the front part of the base frame 21, a stand fixing part 21d to which the lower end of the monitor stand 6 is fixed is arranged. A stand support plate 25 is disposed above the front portion of the base frame 21 so as to extend in the left-right direction in parallel with the stand fixing portion 21d. The stand support plate 25 is fixed by a pair of fixing brackets 26 whose left and right ends are raised and fixed to the base frame 21.
As shown in FIG. 3, the stand support plate 25 has a stand support hole 25a that supports the base end portion 6a of the monitor stand 6 in a non-rotatable manner at the center. Further, the distal end of the base end portion 6 a of the monitor stand 6 is fixed so as not to rotate in a hole (not shown) formed in the stand fixing portion 21 d of the base frame 21. As described above, since the base end portion 6a of the monitor stand 6 is supported by the base frame 21 and the stand support plate 25 so as not to move at the upper and lower portions, the monitor stand is not easily displaced in the radial direction or the tilt direction. Therefore, even when an external force acts on the monitor stand 6 and tries to tilt with respect to the base frame 21, the posture of the monitor stand 6 with respect to the base frame 21 is maintained firmly. That is, the mounting strength of the monitor stand 6 is high, and it is difficult for a problem that the monitor stand 6 wobbles with respect to the mounting portion. Since the monitor stand 6 also functions as a part of the carry handle as will be described later, it is important that the mounting strength is improved as described above.
 第1支持ブラケット22及び第2支持ブラケット23は、図7に示すように、前後X方向に間隔を隔てて配置されている。第1支持ブラケット22及び第2支持ブラケット23は、例えば、鋼板を折り曲げ加工して形成されており、可動フレーム12を傾動自在に両端支持する。第1支持ブラケット22は、ベースフレーム21の後部(手前側)に固定されている。第1支持ブラケット22は、左右一対の第1固定部分22aと一対の第1固定部分22aを上部でつなぐ第1支持部分22bと、を有している。第1固定部分22aは、第1支持部分22bの両端を折り曲げて形成されており、ベースフレーム21に固定されている。第2支持ブラケット23は、第1支持ブラケット22の前方に対向する位置でベースフレーム21に固定されている。第2支持ブラケット23は、第1支持ブラケット22と概ね同様な構成であり、一対の第2固定部分23aと第2支持部分23bと、を有している。 The 1st support bracket 22 and the 2nd support bracket 23 are arrange | positioned at intervals in the front-back X direction, as shown in FIG. The first support bracket 22 and the second support bracket 23 are formed by bending a steel plate, for example, and support the movable frame 12 at both ends in a tiltable manner. The first support bracket 22 is fixed to the rear portion (front side) of the base frame 21. The first support bracket 22 has a pair of left and right first fixed portions 22a and a first support portion 22b that connects the pair of first fixed portions 22a at the top. The first fixed portion 22 a is formed by bending both ends of the first support portion 22 b and is fixed to the base frame 21. The second support bracket 23 is fixed to the base frame 21 at a position facing the front of the first support bracket 22. The 2nd support bracket 23 is the structure substantially the same as the 1st support bracket 22, and has a pair of 2nd fixing | fixed part 23a and the 2nd support part 23b.
 第1支持ブラケット22及び第2支持ブラケット23は、補強部材24により補強されている。補強部材24は、図6及び図7に示すように、平面視D字形状の板状部材である。補強部材24は、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲を構造的に規制する傾動範囲規制機構20の一部を構成している。なお、傾動範囲規制機構20については、後述する。 The first support bracket 22 and the second support bracket 23 are reinforced by a reinforcing member 24. As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the reinforcing member 24 is a plate-like member having a D shape in plan view. The reinforcing member 24 constitutes a part of the tilt range regulating mechanism 20 that structurally regulates the tilt range of the operation rod 15. The tilt range restriction mechanism 20 will be described later.
 補強部材24は、第1固定部分22a及び第2固定部分23aの両外側面をつなぐ一対の第1補強部24aと、第2固定部分23aの内側面をつなぐ第2補強部24bと、第1固定部分22aの内側面をつなぐ第3補強部24cと、を有している。一対の第1補強部24a及び第2補強部24bは一体形成された平面視概ね円弧状の部材である。一対の第1補強部24aは線対称の部材である。一対の第1補強部24a及び第2補強部24bの内周側の端面は円弧状に形成されている。第3補強部24cは、第1補強部24a及び第2補強部24bより低い位置で第1固定部分22aの内側面間をつないでいる。第3補強部24cの内周側の端面は、中央部分が可動フレーム12に向かって滑らかにわずかに突出している(図8参照)。 The reinforcing member 24 includes a pair of first reinforcing portions 24a that connect both outer surfaces of the first fixing portion 22a and the second fixing portion 23a, a second reinforcing portion 24b that connects the inner surface of the second fixing portion 23a, and a first And a third reinforcing portion 24c that connects the inner surface of the fixed portion 22a. A pair of 1st reinforcement part 24a and 2nd reinforcement part 24b are the members of the circular arc shape by planar view formed integrally. The pair of first reinforcing portions 24a is a line-symmetric member. The end surfaces on the inner peripheral side of the pair of first reinforcing portion 24a and second reinforcing portion 24b are formed in an arc shape. The 3rd reinforcement part 24c has connected between the inner surfaces of the 1st fixing | fixed part 22a in the position lower than the 1st reinforcement part 24a and the 2nd reinforcement part 24b. As for the end surface of the 3rd reinforcement part 24c at the inner peripheral side, the center part protrudes smoothly slightly toward the movable frame 12 (refer FIG. 8).
(2-2)可動フレーム
 可動フレーム12は、図7、図8及び図9に示すように、第1ジンバル機構30を有している。第1ジンバル機構30は、固定フレーム11に回動自在に装着された第1可動部分31と、第1可動部分31に回動自在に装着された第2可動部分32と、を有している。
(2-2) Movable Frame The movable frame 12 has a first gimbal mechanism 30 as shown in FIGS. The first gimbal mechanism 30 includes a first movable part 31 that is rotatably attached to the fixed frame 11 and a second movable part 32 that is rotatably attached to the first movable part 31. .
 第1可動部分31は、鋼板を4箇所で折り曲げて形成された概ね矩形枠状に形成された板状部材である。第1可動部分31は、第1支持ブラケット22及び第2支持ブラケット23に前後X方向の軸回りに回動自在に両端支持されている。第2可動部分32は、第1可動部分31の内側に配置され、第1可動部分31より小さい矩形枠状に折り曲げて形成された鋼板製の部材である。第2可動部分32は、第1可動部分31に左右Y方向の軸回りに回動自在に両端支持されている。 The first movable portion 31 is a plate-like member formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape formed by bending a steel plate at four locations. The first movable portion 31 is supported at both ends by the first support bracket 22 and the second support bracket 23 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear X direction. The second movable part 32 is a member made of a steel plate that is disposed inside the first movable part 31 and is bent into a rectangular frame shape smaller than the first movable part 31. The second movable part 32 is supported at both ends by the first movable part 31 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the left-right Y direction.
 第1可動部分31が回動自在に軸支持されている位置と、第2可動部分32が回動自在に軸支持されている位置とは、同じ上下Z方向位置である。したがって、第1可動部分31の回動軸芯X1と第2可動部分32の回動軸芯Y1とは直交して配置されている。この回動軸芯X1と回動軸芯Y1との交点が、第1傾動中心C1である。 The position where the first movable portion 31 is pivotally supported and the position where the second movable portion 32 is pivotally supported are the same vertical Z-direction position. Therefore, the rotation axis X1 of the first movable part 31 and the rotation axis Y1 of the second movable part 32 are arranged orthogonally. The intersection of the rotation axis X1 and the rotation axis Y1 is the first tilt center C1.
(2-3)傾動抵抗付与機構
 図5及び図8を参照して、傾動抵抗付与機構13は、外側の第1可動部分31を回動駆動するための電動のX軸モータ35と、X軸モータ35の出力軸の回転を減速して伝えるX軸減速機構36と、を有している。また、傾動抵抗付与機構13は、内側の第2可動部分32を回動駆動するための電動のY軸モータ33と、Y軸モータ33の出力軸の回転を減速して伝えY軸減速機構34と、をさらに有している。
(2-3) Tilt Resistance Giving Mechanism Referring to FIGS. 5 and 8, the tilt resistance imparting mechanism 13 includes an electric X-axis motor 35 for rotationally driving the outer first movable portion 31, and an X-axis. And an X-axis reduction mechanism 36 that transmits the rotation of the output shaft of the motor 35 at a reduced speed. In addition, the tilting resistance imparting mechanism 13 transmits an electric Y-axis motor 33 for rotationally driving the inner second movable portion 32 and the rotation of the output shaft of the Y-axis motor 33 to reduce and transmit it. And further.
 X軸モータ35及びX軸減速機構36は、例えば、第2支持ブラケット23に固定されている。X軸減速機構36は、第1可動部分31に連結され、X軸モータ35の出力軸の回転を1/60程度の減速比で減速して第1可動部分31に伝える。X軸モータ35は、X軸減速機構36と上下Z方向において床面FLに近い位置に配置され、図示を省略する歯付きベルトによりX軸減速機構36に連結されている。
 Y軸モータ33及びY軸減速機構34は、例えば、外側の第1可動部分31に固定されている。Y軸減速機構34は、第2可動部分32に連結され、Y軸モータ33の出力軸の回転を1/60程度の減速比で減速して第2可動部分32に伝える。Y軸モータ33は、Y軸減速機構34より上下Z方向において床面FLに近い位置に配置され、図示を省略する歯付きベルトによりY軸減速機構34に連結されている。
The X-axis motor 35 and the X-axis reduction mechanism 36 are fixed to the second support bracket 23, for example. The X-axis speed reduction mechanism 36 is connected to the first movable part 31 and transmits the rotation of the output shaft of the X-axis motor 35 to the first movable part 31 with a reduction ratio of about 1/60. The X-axis motor 35 is disposed at a position close to the floor surface FL in the up-down Z direction with the X-axis reduction mechanism 36, and is connected to the X-axis reduction mechanism 36 by a toothed belt (not shown).
The Y-axis motor 33 and the Y-axis speed reduction mechanism 34 are fixed to, for example, the outer first movable part 31. The Y-axis reduction mechanism 34 is connected to the second movable part 32, and transmits the rotation of the output shaft of the Y-axis motor 33 to the second movable part 32 with a reduction ratio of about 1/60. The Y-axis motor 33 is disposed at a position closer to the floor surface FL in the up-down Z direction than the Y-axis reduction mechanism 34 and is connected to the Y-axis reduction mechanism 34 by a toothed belt (not shown).
 X軸モータ35及びY軸モータ33には、操作ロッド15の前後X軸まわり及び左右Y軸まわりの傾動量を検出するためのX軸ロータリエンコーダ38及びY軸ロータリエンコーダ37が連結されている。操作ロッド15の傾動量は、X軸ロータリエンコーダ37及びY軸ロータリエンコーダ38の出力により算出される角度位置及び角度変位量の少なくとも一つと回転方向とを含んでいる。
 傾動抵抗付与機構13は、傾動操作力検出機構14が検出した患者Tの操作力に応じてX軸モータ33及びY軸モータ35の角度位置及び角度変位量の少なくとも一つと回転方向を駆動制御して操作ロッド15に抵抗を付与する。このX軸モータ33及びY軸モータ35は、第1傾動中心C1より下方に配置されている。
Connected to the X-axis motor 35 and the Y-axis motor 33 are an X-axis rotary encoder 38 and a Y-axis rotary encoder 37 for detecting the amount of tilting of the operation rod 15 around the front and rear X axes and the left and right Y axes. The tilting amount of the operating rod 15 includes at least one of the angular position and the angular displacement calculated based on the outputs of the X-axis rotary encoder 37 and the Y-axis rotary encoder 38 and the rotation direction.
The tilt resistance applying mechanism 13 drives and controls at least one of the angular position and the amount of angular displacement of the X-axis motor 33 and the Y-axis motor 35 and the rotation direction according to the operation force of the patient T detected by the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14. To provide resistance to the operating rod 15. The X-axis motor 33 and the Y-axis motor 35 are disposed below the first tilt center C1.
(2-4)傾動操作力検出機構
 傾動操作力検出機構14は、図5~図9に示すように、フレーム10の可動フレーム12と、操作ロッド15との間に配置されている。傾動操作力検出機構14は、前述したように患者Tの傾動操作により操作ロッド15に加わる、前後X方向及び左右Y方向を含む第1傾動中心C1から全方向の傾動操作力及び傾動方向を含む傾動操作ベクトルを検出するための機構である。すなわち、傾動操作力検出機構14は、操作ロッド15の傾動操作時の患者Tの操作力の方向とその操作力の大きさとを検出する。傾動操作力検出機構14は、負荷部材42と、ベクトル検出部39と、を有している。負荷部材42は、操作ロッド15の傾動操作において、傾動方向に係わらず傾動量に対応して所定の弾性抵抗力で変位する。ベクトル検出部39は、負荷部材42の変位により操作ロッド15に作用する傾動操作力及び操作ロッド15の傾動方向を検出する。ベクトル検出部39は、第2ジンバル機構40と、X軸ポテンショメータ41bと、Y軸ポテンショメータ41aと、を有している。
(2-4) Tilt Operation Force Detection Mechanism The tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 is disposed between the movable frame 12 of the frame 10 and the operation rod 15, as shown in FIGS. The tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 includes tilt operation forces and tilt directions in all directions from the first tilt center C1 including the front-rear X direction and the left-right Y direction applied to the operation rod 15 by the tilt operation of the patient T as described above. This is a mechanism for detecting a tilt operation vector. That is, the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 detects the direction of the operation force of the patient T when the operation rod 15 is tilted and the magnitude of the operation force. The tilt operation force detection mechanism 14 includes a load member 42 and a vector detection unit 39. In the tilting operation of the operating rod 15, the load member 42 is displaced by a predetermined elastic resistance force corresponding to the tilting amount regardless of the tilting direction. The vector detection unit 39 detects the tilting operation force acting on the operation rod 15 by the displacement of the load member 42 and the tilting direction of the operation rod 15. The vector detection unit 39 includes a second gimbal mechanism 40, an X-axis potentiometer 41b, and a Y-axis potentiometer 41a.
 この上肢訓練装置1では、患者Tが操作ロッド15を傾動操作すると、負荷部材42が操作力及び傾動方向に応じて変位する。操作ロッド15の傾動操作において、負荷部材42は、傾動方向に係わらず傾動量に対応して所定の弾性抵抗力を発生して変位する。この変位をベクトル検出部39が検出して患者Tの傾動方向及び傾動操作力を含む傾動操作ベクトルが検出される。ここでは、負荷部材42が傾動方向に係わらず傾動量に対応して所定の弾性抵抗力を発生して変位するため、負荷部材の方向依存性を抑えてベクトル検出部39が傾動操作力及び傾動方向を含む傾動操作ベクトルを検出できる。このため、操作ロッド15がいずれの方向に傾動操作されても患者Tの傾動操作ベクトルを精度良く検出できるようになる。この検出結果を用い、患者Tに対して、例えば適切な負荷を与えて患者Tの上肢を訓練できる。 In this upper limb training apparatus 1, when the patient T tilts the operating rod 15, the load member 42 is displaced according to the operating force and the tilting direction. In the tilting operation of the operating rod 15, the load member 42 is displaced by generating a predetermined elastic resistance force corresponding to the tilting amount regardless of the tilting direction. This displacement is detected by the vector detection unit 39, and a tilting operation vector including the tilting direction and tilting operation force of the patient T is detected. Here, since the load member 42 generates and displaces a predetermined elastic resistance force corresponding to the amount of tilt regardless of the tilt direction, the vector detecting unit 39 suppresses the direction dependency of the load member and the tilt detection force and tilt. A tilt operation vector including a direction can be detected. For this reason, the tilting operation vector of the patient T can be detected with high accuracy regardless of which direction the operating rod 15 is tilted. Using this detection result, for example, an appropriate load can be applied to the patient T to train the upper limb of the patient T.
 第2ジンバル機構40は、第2傾動中心C2から全方向に傾動可能に可動フレーム12に支持されている。第2ジンバル機構40は、第2可動部分32に回動自在に装着された第3可動部分43と、第3可動部分43に回動自在に装着された第4可動部分44と、を有している。第3可動部分43は、第2可動部分32に前後X方向の軸回りに回動自在に連結されている。第3可動部分43は、第2可動部分32の内側に配置され、第2可動部分32より小さい矩形枠状に折り曲げて形成された鋼板製の部材である。第4可動部分44は、第3可動部分43に左右Y方向の軸回りに回動自在に連結されている。第4可動部分44は、第3可動部分43の内側に配置され、第3可動部分43より小さい矩形枠状に折り曲げて形成された鋼板製の部材である。第4可動部分44の上部には、操作ロッド15を固定するための4つのロッド固定部44aが対向する二片に折り曲げて形成されている。 The second gimbal mechanism 40 is supported by the movable frame 12 so as to be tiltable in all directions from the second tilt center C2. The second gimbal mechanism 40 includes a third movable part 43 that is rotatably attached to the second movable part 32, and a fourth movable part 44 that is rotatably attached to the third movable part 43. ing. The third movable part 43 is connected to the second movable part 32 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear X direction. The third movable portion 43 is a steel plate member that is disposed inside the second movable portion 32 and is bent into a rectangular frame shape smaller than the second movable portion 32. The fourth movable portion 44 is connected to the third movable portion 43 so as to be rotatable about the axis in the left-right Y direction. The fourth movable portion 44 is a member made of a steel plate that is disposed inside the third movable portion 43 and is formed by being bent into a rectangular frame shape smaller than the third movable portion 43. Four rod fixing portions 44a for fixing the operation rod 15 are formed on the upper portion of the fourth movable portion 44 by bending them into two opposing pieces.
 第3可動部分43が回動自在に支持されている位置と、第4可動部分44が回動自在に支持されている位置とは、同じ上下Z方向位置である。したがって、第3可動部分43の回動軸芯X2と第4可動部分44の回動軸芯Y2とは直交して配置されている。また、この実施形態では、操作ロッド15が傾動せずに上方を向いているとき、第1ジンバル機構30と第2ジンバル機構40において、回動軸芯X1と回動軸芯X2は同一線上に配置され、回動軸芯Y1と回動軸芯Y2とは同一線上に配置されている。したがって、第1ジンバル機構30及び第2ジンバル機構40の支持位置は、上下Z軸方向の同じ高さ位置にある。すなわち、固定フレーム11に対して可動フレーム12がピボット回転可能に軸支持される位置と、可動フレーム12に対して操作ロッド15がピボット回転可能に軸支持される位置とが同一平面上に配置されている。この回動軸芯X2と回動軸芯Y2との交点が第2傾動中心C2であり、第1傾動中心C1と同じ位置にある。 The position where the third movable part 43 is rotatably supported and the position where the fourth movable part 44 is rotatably supported are the same vertical Z-direction position. Therefore, the rotation axis X2 of the third movable part 43 and the rotation axis Y2 of the fourth movable part 44 are arranged orthogonally. Further, in this embodiment, when the operating rod 15 is directed upward without being tilted, in the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40, the rotation axis X1 and the rotation axis X2 are on the same line. The rotation axis Y1 and the rotation axis Y2 are arranged on the same line. Therefore, the support positions of the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40 are at the same height position in the vertical Z-axis direction. That is, the position where the movable frame 12 is pivotally supported with respect to the fixed frame 11 and the position where the operation rod 15 is pivotally supported with respect to the movable frame 12 are arranged on the same plane. ing. The intersection of the rotation axis X2 and the rotation axis Y2 is the second tilt center C2, and is at the same position as the first tilt center C1.
 X軸ポテンショメータ41bは、第2可動部分32に固定され、第3可動部分43の回動軸心X2まわりの回動量を検出する。Y軸ポテンショメータ41aは、第3可動部分43に固定され、第4可動部分44の回動軸心Y2まわりの回動量を検出する。 The X-axis potentiometer 41b is fixed to the second movable part 32 and detects the amount of rotation around the rotation axis X2 of the third movable part 43. The Y-axis potentiometer 41a is fixed to the third movable part 43 and detects the amount of rotation around the rotation axis Y2 of the fourth movable part 44.
 負荷部材42は、傾動方向に係わらず操作ロッド15の傾動量に対応して所定の弾性抵抗力を発生して変位する。すなわち、負荷部材42は、方向依存性が小さい部材である。負荷部材42は、図9に示すように、第1ジンバル機構30の第2可動部分32と第2ジンバル機構40の第4可動部分44との間に配置された複数(例えば4枚)の板バネ45を有している。第2可動部分32及び第4可動部分44には、板バネ45を固定するための一対の固定ブラケット32a及び一対の固定ブラケット44bがそれぞれ下方に延びて形成されている。
 4枚の板バネ45は、図9及び図10に示すように、それぞれ、金属薄板を切り抜いて形成されており、同一形状である。4枚の板バネ45の間及び最上層には、金属薄板製のスペーサ46aが配置されている。これにより、負荷部材42の変位時の板バネ45同士の干渉を避けることができ、板バネ45は中心部位45aが外周部位45bに対して変位しやすくなる。このため、精度良く傾動操作ベクトルを検出できる。各板バネ45は、中心部位45aと、外周側の外周部位45bと、一端が中心部位45aに接続され他端が外周部位45bに接続された渦巻き部位45cと、を有している。操作ロッド15の下端部が板バネ45の中心部位45aに配置され、渦巻き部位45cが操作ロッド15の傾動操作力に応じて変位する。具体的には、操作ロッド15が固定された第4可動部分44の固定ブラケット44bの先端部が中心部位45aに固定されている。渦巻き部位45cが外周部位45bと中心部位45aとの間に配置されているので、中心部位45aに固定された操作ロッド15は、外周部位45bに対して変形しやすい。渦巻き部位45cの幅は、実質的に一定である。これにより、傾動方向に係わらず渦巻き部位45cが傾動量に対して所定の弾性抵抗力を発生しやすい。
The load member 42 is displaced by generating a predetermined elastic resistance force corresponding to the amount of tilting of the operation rod 15 regardless of the tilting direction. That is, the load member 42 is a member having a small direction dependency. As shown in FIG. 9, the load member 42 includes a plurality of (for example, four) plates disposed between the second movable portion 32 of the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the fourth movable portion 44 of the second gimbal mechanism 40. A spring 45 is provided. A pair of fixed brackets 32 a and a pair of fixed brackets 44 b for fixing the leaf spring 45 are respectively formed on the second movable part 32 and the fourth movable part 44 so as to extend downward.
As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the four leaf springs 45 are each formed by cutting out a thin metal plate and have the same shape. A thin metal spacer 46a is arranged between the four leaf springs 45 and in the uppermost layer. Thereby, interference between the leaf springs 45 when the load member 42 is displaced can be avoided, and the leaf spring 45 is likely to displace the central portion 45a relative to the outer peripheral portion 45b. For this reason, the tilting operation vector can be detected with high accuracy. Each leaf spring 45 has a central part 45a, an outer peripheral part 45b on the outer peripheral side, and a spiral part 45c having one end connected to the central part 45a and the other end connected to the outer peripheral part 45b. The lower end portion of the operation rod 15 is disposed at the central portion 45 a of the leaf spring 45, and the spiral portion 45 c is displaced according to the tilting operation force of the operation rod 15. Specifically, the distal end portion of the fixed bracket 44b of the fourth movable portion 44 to which the operation rod 15 is fixed is fixed to the central portion 45a. Since the spiral part 45c is disposed between the outer peripheral part 45b and the central part 45a, the operation rod 15 fixed to the central part 45a is easily deformed with respect to the outer peripheral part 45b. The width of the spiral portion 45c is substantially constant. As a result, the spiral portion 45c is likely to generate a predetermined elastic resistance force with respect to the tilt amount regardless of the tilt direction.
 スペーサ46aは、外周部位45bに重ねて配置されたリング状の部材である。また、中心部位45aの間にはスペーサ46aと同じ厚みのワッシャ46bが配置されている。
 渦巻き形状の板バネ45は、外周部位45b及び中心部位45aの加工が容易であり、かつ精度良く加工を行える。このため、方向依存性を抑えた負荷部材を精度良く容易に作成できる。
The spacer 46a is a ring-shaped member disposed so as to overlap the outer peripheral portion 45b. A washer 46b having the same thickness as the spacer 46a is disposed between the central portions 45a.
The spiral leaf spring 45 can easily process the outer peripheral portion 45b and the central portion 45a and can perform processing with high accuracy. For this reason, the load member which suppressed direction dependence can be created easily with sufficient accuracy.
 外周部位45bは、真円形状であり、スペーサ46aと外周面が同形状である。従って、4枚の板バネ45と4枚のスペーサとを重ねて配置すると、負荷部材42の外周面は円形に揃う。これにより、板バネ45の外周部位とスペーサ46aとを重ねて配置してもスムースな外観を得ることができ、負荷部材42を操作ロッド15の傾動方向の傾動制限部材(後述)として用いやすくなる。 The outer peripheral portion 45b has a perfect circular shape, and the spacer 46a and the outer peripheral surface have the same shape. Therefore, when the four leaf springs 45 and the four spacers are arranged so as to overlap each other, the outer peripheral surface of the load member 42 is arranged in a circular shape. As a result, a smooth appearance can be obtained even if the outer peripheral portion of the leaf spring 45 and the spacer 46a are overlapped, and the load member 42 can be easily used as a tilt limiting member (described later) in the tilt direction of the operating rod 15. .
 負荷部材42は、後述するように、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲を機械的に規制する傾動範囲規制機構20(図7参照)において操作ロッド15の傾動範囲を制限するための傾動制限部材としての機能も有している。すなわち、負荷部材42すなわち傾動制限部材が補強部材24に接触して操作ロッド15の傾動範囲が構造的に規制される。ここでは、スペーサ46aと板バネ45の外周部位45bとが同じ真円形状になっているため、負荷部材42を傾動制限部材として用いても、補強部材24の内周側の端面に対して傾動方向に係わらず負荷部材42を点接触で接触させることができる。このため、傾動方向に係わらず操作ロッド15を概ね同じ傾動角度で規制できる。 As will be described later, the load member 42 functions as a tilt limiting member for limiting the tilting range of the operating rod 15 in the tilting range regulating mechanism 20 (see FIG. 7) that mechanically regulates the tilting range of the operating rod 15. Also have. That is, the load member 42, that is, the tilt limiting member contacts the reinforcing member 24, and the tilt range of the operation rod 15 is structurally restricted. Here, since the spacer 46a and the outer peripheral part 45b of the leaf spring 45 have the same perfect circular shape, even if the load member 42 is used as the tilt limiting member, the spacer 46a tilts with respect to the inner peripheral side end surface of the reinforcing member 24. Regardless of the direction, the load member 42 can be brought into point contact. For this reason, the operation rod 15 can be regulated at substantially the same tilt angle regardless of the tilt direction.
 外周部位45bは、例えば4本のボルト部材19aにより第2可動部分32の固定ブラケット32aに固定されている。このように複数の板バネ45は、一括して可動フレーム12に取り付けられている。これにより、負荷部材42の着脱が容易である。また、中心部位45aは、例えば1本のボルト部材19bにより第4可動部分44の固定ブラケット44bの底面に固定されている。これにより、操作ロッド15の下端部が中心部位45aに配置される。 The outer peripheral portion 45b is fixed to the fixed bracket 32a of the second movable portion 32 by, for example, four bolt members 19a. In this way, the plurality of leaf springs 45 are attached to the movable frame 12 in a lump. Thereby, the load member 42 can be easily attached and detached. Further, the central portion 45a is fixed to the bottom surface of the fixed bracket 44b of the fourth movable portion 44, for example, by one bolt member 19b. Thereby, the lower end part of the operating rod 15 is arrange | positioned in the center site | part 45a.
 4枚の板バネ45は、表裏の反転及び180度位相をずらして配置されている。例えば、図10において、最下段に配置された板バネ45に対して、下から二段目の板バネ45は180度位相をずらして配置されている。また、その上方の上から二段目の板バネ45は、下から二段面の板バネ45に対して表裏反転して配置されている。最上段の板バネ45は、上から二段面の板バネ45に対して180度位相をずらして配置されている。これにより、操作ロッド15に作用する傾動操作力がどのような方向であっても、渦巻き部位45cが、概ね同じ大きさの弾性抵抗力を発生する。この結果、負荷部材42の方向依存性が小さくなる。 The four leaf springs 45 are arranged with the front and back reversed and 180 degrees out of phase. For example, in FIG. 10, the plate spring 45 in the second stage from the bottom is arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees with respect to the plate spring 45 arranged in the lowermost stage. In addition, the second-stage leaf spring 45 from above the upper side is disposed so as to be reversed with respect to the second-stage plate spring 45 from the bottom. The uppermost leaf spring 45 is arranged 180 degrees out of phase with respect to the leaf spring 45 of the second step surface from above. As a result, regardless of the direction of the tilting operation force acting on the operation rod 15, the spiral portion 45c generates an elastic resistance force having substantially the same magnitude. As a result, the direction dependency of the load member 42 is reduced.
 さらに方向依存性を小さくするために、渦巻き部位45cは、外周部位45bと同芯に配置された第1円弧部位45dと、第1円弧部位45dより小径で第1円弧部位45dと同芯に配置された第2円弧部位45eと、を有している。第1円弧部位45d及び第2円弧部位45eは方向依存性が小さいので、渦巻き部位45cの方向依存性を低減できる。また、渦巻き部位45cは、外周部位45bと、第1円弧部位45dとを連結する第1連結部位45fと、第1円弧部位45dと第2円弧部位45eを連結する第2連結部位45gと、第2円弧部位45eと中心部位45aとを連結する第3連結部位45hと、を有している。第1円弧部位45d及び第2円弧部位45eは、渦巻き部位45cの3/4以上の角度範囲をそれぞれ占めている。このように方向依存性が小さい第1円弧部位45d及び第2円弧部位45eが渦巻き部位45cの多くの領域を占めるので、渦巻き部位45cの方向依存性が低減される。 In order to further reduce the direction dependency, the spiral part 45c is arranged concentrically with the first arc part 45d having a smaller diameter than the first arc part 45d and a first arc part 45d arranged concentrically with the outer peripheral part 45b. Second arc portion 45e. Since the first arc portion 45d and the second arc portion 45e have small direction dependency, the direction dependency of the spiral portion 45c can be reduced. The spiral part 45c includes a first connection part 45f that connects the outer peripheral part 45b and the first arc part 45d, a second connection part 45g that connects the first arc part 45d and the second arc part 45e, A second arc portion 45e and a third connecting portion 45h for connecting the central portion 45a. The first arc portion 45d and the second arc portion 45e occupy an angular range of 3/4 or more of the spiral portion 45c. Since the first arc portion 45d and the second arc portion 45e having a small direction dependency occupy a large area of the spiral portion 45c, the direction dependency of the spiral portion 45c is reduced.
 第1連結部位45f、第2連結部位45g及び第3連結部位45hは、所定の同じ角度範囲に偏って配置されている。この実施形態では、第1連結部位45f、第2連結部位45g及び第3連結部位45hは、第1円弧部位45d及び第2円弧部位45eの始点と終点の間の角度範囲に配置されている。このように方向依存性が大きい第1連結部位45f、第2連結部位45g及び第3連結部位45hが所定の角度範囲に偏って配置されているので、位相を変えて及び/又は表裏を反転させて第1連結部位45f、第2連結部位45g及び第3連結部位45hを配置することにより、第1連結部位45f、第2連結部位45g及び第3連結部位45hによる方向依存性を打ち消すことができる。 The first connection part 45f, the second connection part 45g, and the third connection part 45h are arranged so as to be biased in the same predetermined angular range. In this embodiment, the 1st connection part 45f, the 2nd connection part 45g, and the 3rd connection part 45h are arranged in the angle range between the starting point and the end point of the 1st circular arc part 45d and the 2nd circular arc part 45e. Since the first connection part 45f, the second connection part 45g, and the third connection part 45h having a large direction dependency are arranged in a predetermined angular range, the phase is changed and / or the front and back are reversed. By arranging the first connection part 45f, the second connection part 45g, and the third connection part 45h, it is possible to cancel the direction dependency due to the first connection part 45f, the second connection part 45g, and the third connection part 45h. .
 以上に述べたように、負荷部材42は、4枚の板バネ45を有し、2枚の板バネ45と残りの2枚の板バネ45とが表裏反転して交互に重ねて配置され、かつ同じ向きに配置された2枚の板バネ45が位相を180度ずらして配置されている。これにより、表裏及び位相が異なる四種類の板バネ45が重ねて配置されるので、負荷部材42の方向依存性を抑えて精度良く傾動操作ベクトルを検出できる。 As described above, the load member 42 includes the four leaf springs 45, and the two leaf springs 45 and the remaining two leaf springs 45 are arranged so as to be reversed alternately and overlap each other. Two leaf springs 45 arranged in the same direction are arranged with the phase shifted by 180 degrees. As a result, four types of leaf springs 45 having different front and back surfaces and phases are arranged in an overlapping manner, so that the tilt operation vector can be detected with high accuracy while suppressing the direction dependency of the load member 42.
 なお、負荷部材は、4枚でなくても偶数枚の板バネを有していれば、半分の板バネと残りの半分の板バネとで表裏反転して交互に重ねて配置できる。この場合には、板バネの向きが表裏の二種類になりさらに表裏二種類の板バネが交互に重ねて配置されるため、さらに負荷部材の方向依存性を抑えて精度良く傾動操作ベクトルを検出できる。さらに、負荷部材は偶数枚でなくても複数枚の板バネを有していれば、少なくとも一枚の板バネの渦巻き部位の回転方向の位相をずらして配置できる。これにより、位相がずれて配置された板バネとずれていない板バネとの間とで、傾動方向に対して弾性抵抗力が異なるため、さらに負荷部材の方向依存性を抑えて精度良く傾動操作ベクトルを検出できる。 In addition, if the load member has an even number of leaf springs instead of four, the load member can be alternately and alternately placed with the half leaf spring and the remaining half leaf spring reversed. In this case, there are two types of leaf springs on the front and back sides, and two types of leaf springs are placed on top of each other, so that the tilting operation vector can be detected with high accuracy while suppressing the direction dependency of the load member. it can. Furthermore, even if the load member is not an even number, if the load member has a plurality of leaf springs, the rotational direction of at least one spiral portion of the leaf spring can be shifted. As a result, the elastic resistance force differs between the leaf springs arranged out of phase and the leaf springs not displaced, and the tilting operation can be performed with high accuracy while suppressing the direction dependency of the load member. A vector can be detected.
(2-5)操作ロッド
 操作ロッド15は、図6に示すように、傾動操作力検出機構14により前後X方向及び左右Y方向に傾動可能に可動フレーム12に軸支持されている。図3を参照して、操作ロッド15は、操作ロッド本体57と、アタッチメント取付部59と、を有している。操作ロッド本体57は、伸縮機構47と、伸縮機構47の周囲を覆うロッドカバー48と、を有している。
(2-5) Operation Rod As shown in FIG. 6, the operation rod 15 is supported by the movable frame 12 so as to be tiltable in the front-rear X direction and the left-right Y direction by the tilt operation force detection mechanism 14. With reference to FIG. 3, the operating rod 15 has an operating rod main body 57 and an attachment mounting portion 59. The operation rod main body 57 includes an expansion / contraction mechanism 47 and a rod cover 48 that covers the periphery of the expansion / contraction mechanism 47.
 図11及び図12を参照して、伸縮機構47は、固定ステイ49と、固定ステイ49に対して上下動する可動ステイ50と、可動ステイ50を直線的に案内するリニアガイド51と、可動ステイ50を上下させる昇降機構52と、を有している。 11 and 12, the telescopic mechanism 47 includes a fixed stay 49, a movable stay 50 that moves up and down relative to the fixed stay 49, a linear guide 51 that linearly guides the movable stay 50, and a movable stay. And an elevating mechanism 52 that raises and lowers 50.
 固定ステイ49は、可動フレーム12に装着され、より具体的には、図6及び図7に示す傾動操作力検出機構14の第4可動部分44のロッド固定部44aにボルトにより上側から固定される。これにより、外装カバー18を外した状態で第2ジンバル機構40から固定ステイ49を取り外すことができる。このため、操作ロッド15は、可動フレーム12に対して着脱可能であり、訓練内容や訓練環境に応じて又は故障したときに操作ロッド15を交換可能である。 The fixed stay 49 is attached to the movable frame 12, and more specifically, is fixed from above to the rod fixing portion 44a of the fourth movable portion 44 of the tilting operation force detection mechanism 14 shown in FIGS. . Thereby, the fixed stay 49 can be removed from the second gimbal mechanism 40 with the exterior cover 18 removed. For this reason, the operation rod 15 can be attached to and detached from the movable frame 12, and the operation rod 15 can be exchanged according to the training contents and the training environment or when a failure occurs.
 固定ステイ49は、図12に示すように、断面が溝形鋼形状になるように鋼板を折り曲げて形成された部材である。固定ステイ49の下端側の左右面には、第4可動部分44のロッド固定部44aに固定されるL字形状の固定ブラケット49bが固定されている。固定ステイ49の下部には90度折り曲げて形成されたモータ支持部49aが形成されている。モータ支持部49aの下面には、Z軸モータ61が固定されている。固定ステイ49の内側面には、リニアガイド51を構成する上下方向に長い案内レール53が固定されている(図11参照)。また、固定ステイ49の下端には、その上下端にわたって延びる昇降機構52を構成するボールネジ軸55が回転自在に支持されている。 As shown in FIG. 12, the fixed stay 49 is a member formed by bending a steel plate so that the cross section has a grooved steel shape. An L-shaped fixing bracket 49 b fixed to the rod fixing portion 44 a of the fourth movable portion 44 is fixed to the left and right surfaces on the lower end side of the fixed stay 49. A motor support portion 49 a formed by bending 90 degrees is formed below the fixed stay 49. A Z-axis motor 61 is fixed to the lower surface of the motor support 49a. A guide rail 53 that constitutes the linear guide 51 and is long in the vertical direction is fixed to the inner side surface of the fixed stay 49 (see FIG. 11). Further, a ball screw shaft 55 constituting an elevating mechanism 52 extending over the upper and lower ends is rotatably supported at the lower end of the fixed stay 49.
 図13を参照して、可動ステイ50は、固定ステイ49の内部に配置され上下方向に長い部材である。可動ステイ50は、断面が門形(ダブルハウジング)形状になるように鋼板を折り曲げて形成された内枠部材50a及び外枠部材50bを有している。外枠部材50bは内枠部材50aの外側面に可動ステイ50の断面が矩形になるように対向して配置されている。 Referring to FIG. 13, the movable stay 50 is a member that is disposed inside the fixed stay 49 and is long in the vertical direction. The movable stay 50 includes an inner frame member 50a and an outer frame member 50b formed by bending a steel plate so that the cross section has a gate shape (double housing) shape. The outer frame member 50b is disposed opposite to the outer surface of the inner frame member 50a so that the movable stay 50 has a rectangular cross section.
 内枠部材50aの下部には、案内レール53に案内されるスライドユニット54がブロック50dに固定されている。内枠部材50aは、図14に示すように、ブロック50d及びスライドユニット54を両側から挟んでスライドユニット54を保持している。このスライドユニット54と、案内レール53とにより、リニアガイド51が構成される。内枠部材50aのスライドユニット54固定部分であるブロック50dには、昇降機構52を構成するボールナット56が固定されている。ボールナット56は、ボールネジ軸55に螺合する。これにより、可動ステイ50は、固定ステイ49に沿って伸縮方向(上下Z方向)に直線移動自在である。 The slide unit 54 guided by the guide rail 53 is fixed to the block 50d below the inner frame member 50a. As shown in FIG. 14, the inner frame member 50a holds the slide unit 54 with the block 50d and the slide unit 54 sandwiched from both sides. The slide unit 54 and the guide rail 53 constitute a linear guide 51. A ball nut 56 constituting the elevating mechanism 52 is fixed to the block 50d, which is a portion where the slide unit 54 is fixed to the inner frame member 50a. The ball nut 56 is screwed onto the ball screw shaft 55. Thereby, the movable stay 50 is linearly movable along the fixed stay 49 in the expansion / contraction direction (vertical Z direction).
 以上に述べたように、可動ステイ50に固定されたブロック50dにボールナット56及びスライドユニット54が取り付けられ、可動ステイ50にブロック50d及びスライドユニット54が両側から挟み込むように取り付けられている。また、固定ステイ49にボールネジ軸55及び案内レール53が取り付けられる。このため、スライドユニット54及びボールナット56が可動ステイ50に対して軸ずれしにくくなり、かつ固定ステイ49の強度を向上させることができる。 As described above, the ball nut 56 and the slide unit 54 are attached to the block 50d fixed to the movable stay 50, and the block 50d and the slide unit 54 are attached to the movable stay 50 so as to be sandwiched from both sides. Further, the ball screw shaft 55 and the guide rail 53 are attached to the fixed stay 49. For this reason, the slide unit 54 and the ball nut 56 are less likely to be misaligned with respect to the movable stay 50, and the strength of the fixed stay 49 can be improved.
 内枠部材50aの下端部50cは、図13及び図14に示すように、下方に垂下した被検出片58aを有する被検出部58となっている。被検出部58は、下端位置検出部60により検出されて可動ステイ50の下端位置を検出するために設けられている。下端位置検出部60は、例えば、固定ステイ49に固定された投受光型の光電センサ(フォトインタラプタ)60aである。光電センサ60aは、開放していた光路が被検出片58aにより遮断されることにより、可動ステイ50の下端位置を検出する。ここでは、可動ステイ50の下端部から垂下した被検出片58aを検出して下端位置を検出しているので、可動ステイ50の下端位置を可及的に下方に配置できる。また、信号を送る配線が必要な下端位置検出部60が固定ステイ49に固定されているので、操作ロッド15が伸縮しても配線が切断しにくくなる。 As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the lower end portion 50c of the inner frame member 50a is a detected portion 58 having a detected piece 58a that hangs downward. The detected part 58 is provided for detecting the lower end position of the movable stay 50 detected by the lower end position detecting part 60. The lower end position detection unit 60 is, for example, a light emitting / receiving photoelectric sensor (photo interrupter) 60 a fixed to the fixed stay 49. The photoelectric sensor 60a detects the lower end position of the movable stay 50 by blocking the opened optical path by the detected piece 58a. Here, since the detected piece 58a suspended from the lower end portion of the movable stay 50 is detected and the lower end position is detected, the lower end position of the movable stay 50 can be arranged as low as possible. In addition, since the lower end position detecting unit 60 that requires wiring for sending a signal is fixed to the fixed stay 49, the wiring is difficult to cut even if the operation rod 15 expands and contracts.
 ボールネジ軸55は、下端部のみが軸受により固定ステイ49に回転自在に支持されている。ボールネジ軸55の下端部は、カップリング62を介して電動のZ軸モータ61の出力軸61aに一体回転可能に連結されている。出力軸61aとボールネジ軸55とは同芯に配置されている。 Only the lower end of the ball screw shaft 55 is rotatably supported on the fixed stay 49 by a bearing. A lower end portion of the ball screw shaft 55 is coupled to an output shaft 61 a of an electric Z-axis motor 61 through a coupling 62 so as to be integrally rotatable. The output shaft 61a and the ball screw shaft 55 are arranged concentrically.
 操作ロッド15の傾動範囲は、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいた制御、及び傾動範囲規制機構20によって、制限されている。まず、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲が、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいてソフトウェア的に制限される場合の説明を行う。移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいた制御は、図25に示すように、訓練装置本体3に含まれる記憶部100及び制御部110によって、実行される。記憶部100は、各種のデータを記憶する。例えば、記憶部100は、各種プログラム、各種パラメータ、各種のデータ、及び処理中のデータ等を、一時的及び/又は長期的に記憶する。例えば、記憶部100は、ROM(Read Only Memory)と、RAM(Random Access Memory)とを、含んでいる。 The tilting range of the operating rod 15 is limited by the control based on the moving range regulation program and the tilting range regulation mechanism 20. First, the case where the tilting range of the operating rod 15 is limited by software based on the moving range regulation program will be described. Control based on the movement range regulation program is executed by the storage unit 100 and the control unit 110 included in the training apparatus body 3 as shown in FIG. The storage unit 100 stores various data. For example, the storage unit 100 temporarily and / or long-term stores various programs, various parameters, various data, data being processed, and the like. For example, the storage unit 100 includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) and a RAM (Random Access Memory).
 制御部110は、各種機構に対して制御信号を発行し、各種機構を制御する。また、制御部110は、各種判断処理を実行し、判断結果に基づいて各種機構を制御する。例えば、制御部110は、制御及び計算に関するプログラムを、記憶部100から読み出すことによって、各種制御、各種判断処理、及び各種計算を実行し、各種機構を制御する。制御部110は、例えば、CPU(Central Processing Unit)を、含んでいる。なお、制御部110は、バス115を介して、記憶部100に接続されている。 The control unit 110 issues control signals to various mechanisms and controls the various mechanisms. In addition, the control unit 110 executes various determination processes, and controls various mechanisms based on the determination results. For example, the control unit 110 reads various programs related to control and calculation from the storage unit 100 to execute various controls, various determination processes, and various calculations, and controls various mechanisms. The control unit 110 includes, for example, a CPU (Central Processing Unit). The control unit 110 is connected to the storage unit 100 via the bus 115.
 移動範囲規制プログラムは、可動フレーム12の可動範囲を制限するためのものであり、記憶部100に記憶されている。ここでは、制御部110が、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいて、可動フレーム12の動作を制御する。移動範囲規制プログラムは、図25に示すように、可動フレーム12の動作を検知する検知部111と、可動フレーム12の傾動状態を示す状態角度hを計算する計算部112と、可動フレーム12の状態角度hが所定の角度を越えたか否かを監視する監視部113と、可動フレーム12の状態角度hが所定の角度を越えた場合に可動フレーム12の動作を停止させる動作停止部114と、を有している。 The movement range restriction program is for restricting the movable range of the movable frame 12 and is stored in the storage unit 100. Here, the control unit 110 controls the operation of the movable frame 12 based on the movement range restriction program. As shown in FIG. 25, the movement range regulation program includes a detection unit 111 that detects the operation of the movable frame 12, a calculation unit 112 that calculates a state angle h that indicates the tilting state of the movable frame 12, and the state of the movable frame 12. A monitoring unit 113 that monitors whether the angle h exceeds a predetermined angle, and an operation stop unit 114 that stops the operation of the movable frame 12 when the state angle h of the movable frame 12 exceeds a predetermined angle. Have.
 なお、上記の状態角度hは、第1傾動中心C1を基準として、床面に対する垂直方向軸(Z軸)と操作ロッド15の軸芯とがなす角度に対応する。すなわち、状態角度hは、X軸回りの傾動角度αx及びY軸回りの傾動角度αyを合成した角度に対応する。 The above state angle h corresponds to the angle formed by the axis (Z axis) perpendicular to the floor surface and the axis of the operating rod 15 with respect to the first tilt center C1. That is, the state angle h corresponds to an angle obtained by combining the tilt angle αx around the X axis and the tilt angle αy around the Y axis.
 例えば、図26に示すように、可動フレーム12が動作を開始すると、検知部111が可動フレーム12の動作を検知する(S1)。より具体的には、検知部111は、X軸ロータリエンコーダ37及びY軸ロータリエンコーダ38の出力を検知する。すると、計算部112は、X軸ロータリエンコーダ37及びY軸ロータリエンコーダ38の出力、例えばX軸回りの傾動角度αx及びY軸回りの傾動角度αyに基づいて、可動フレーム12の状態角度h及び最大状態角度hを、所定の時間間隔で計算する(S2)。 For example, as shown in FIG. 26, when the movable frame 12 starts operating, the detection unit 111 detects the operation of the movable frame 12 (S1). More specifically, the detection unit 111 detects the outputs of the X-axis rotary encoder 37 and the Y-axis rotary encoder 38. Then, the calculation unit 112 calculates the state angle h and the maximum of the movable frame 12 based on the outputs of the X-axis rotary encoder 37 and the Y-axis rotary encoder 38, for example, the tilt angle αx about the X axis and the tilt angle αy about the Y axis. The state angle h is calculated at predetermined time intervals (S2).
 最大状態角度Hは、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいた制御において許可される状態角度hの最大値である。最大状態角度Hは、訓練の安全性や効果を総合的に考慮して、適切な値に設定される。 The maximum state angle H is the maximum value of the state angle h permitted in the control based on the movement range restriction program. The maximum state angle H is set to an appropriate value by comprehensively considering the safety and effect of training.
 続いて、監視部113は、可動フレーム12の状態角度hが、最大状態角度Hを越えたか否かを常に監視しており(S3)、可動フレーム12の状態角度hが最大状態角度Hを越えた場合(S3でYes)、動作停止部114が、傾動抵抗付与機構13に対して駆動停止命令を発行する。すると、傾動抵抗付与機構13が動作を停止し、可動フレーム12すなわち操作ロッド15は、最大状態角度Hを越えた範囲へ、移動不能になる(S4)。 Subsequently, the monitoring unit 113 constantly monitors whether or not the state angle h of the movable frame 12 exceeds the maximum state angle H (S3), and the state angle h of the movable frame 12 exceeds the maximum state angle H. In the case (Yes in S3), the operation stop unit 114 issues a drive stop command to the tilting resistance applying mechanism 13. Then, the tilting resistance imparting mechanism 13 stops its operation, and the movable frame 12, that is, the operating rod 15, becomes unable to move to a range exceeding the maximum state angle H (S4).
 なお、可動フレーム12の状態角度hが最大状態角度H未満である場合(S3でNo)、ステップ2(S2)の処理及びステップ3(S3)の処理が、実行される。 If the state angle h of the movable frame 12 is less than the maximum state angle H (No in S3), the process in Step 2 (S2) and the process in Step 3 (S3) are executed.
 このように、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいた制御では、可動フレーム12の状態角度hが最大状態角度H以下になるように制限することによって、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲(後述する第2傾動範囲)が設定されている。これにより、患者Tが、操作ロッド15をあらゆる方向に操作したとしても、操作ロッド15は、所定の傾動範囲を越えて移動することができないので、患者Tが椅子4から滑り落ちにくくなり、患者Tの安全性を確保できる。 As described above, in the control based on the movement range regulation program, by restricting the state angle h of the movable frame 12 to be equal to or smaller than the maximum state angle H, the tilt range of the operation rod 15 (second tilt range described later). Is set. Thereby, even if the patient T operates the operation rod 15 in any direction, the operation rod 15 cannot move beyond the predetermined tilting range, so that the patient T is less likely to slide off the chair 4 and the patient T T safety can be secured.
 次に、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲が、傾動範囲規制機構20により構造的に制限される場合の説明を行う。構造的に操作ロッド15が動作可能な傾動範囲(以下では、第1傾動範囲と呼ぶ)は、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいて可動フレーム12が制御された状態において操作ロッド15が動作可能な傾動範囲(以下では、第2傾動範囲と呼ぶ)より大きい。ここでは、第1傾動範囲は、第2傾動範囲より、例えば3度程度大きい傾動範囲に設定している。 Next, the case where the tilting range of the operating rod 15 is structurally limited by the tilting range restriction mechanism 20 will be described. The tilting range in which the operating rod 15 can be structurally operated (hereinafter referred to as the first tilting range) is a tilting range in which the operating rod 15 can be operated in a state where the movable frame 12 is controlled based on the movement range regulation program. (Hereinafter referred to as the second tilt range). Here, the first tilt range is set to a tilt range that is, for example, about 3 degrees larger than the second tilt range.
 言い換えると、第2傾動範囲は、第1傾動範囲より小さい。すなわち、第2傾動範囲が第1傾動範囲より小さくなるように、上記の最大状態角度Hは設定される。ここでは、第2傾動範囲が第1傾動範囲より例えば10度程度小さくなるように、上記の最大状態角度Hは設定されている。 In other words, the second tilt range is smaller than the first tilt range. That is, the maximum state angle H is set so that the second tilt range is smaller than the first tilt range. Here, the maximum state angle H is set so that the second tilt range is smaller than the first tilt range by, for example, about 10 degrees.
 傾動範囲規制機構20は、操作ロッド15の傾動を制限するためのストッパ部24dと、ストッパ部24dに接触する負荷部材42(傾動制限部材)とから構成されている。詳細には、ストッパ部24dは、補強部材24a~24cの内周側の端面である。この場合、操作ロッド15が傾動し、負荷部材42が傾動制限部材としてストッパ部24dに接触することによって、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲が構造的に制限される。また、補強部材24cの内周側の端面の形状及び範囲は、操作ロッド15がモニタ7に干渉しないように、形成されている。 The tilting range restriction mechanism 20 includes a stopper portion 24d for restricting the tilting of the operating rod 15, and a load member 42 (tilting restriction member) that contacts the stopper portion 24d. Specifically, the stopper portion 24d is an end surface on the inner peripheral side of the reinforcing members 24a to 24c. In this case, the operating rod 15 tilts and the load member 42 contacts the stopper portion 24d as a tilt limiting member, so that the tilting range of the operating rod 15 is structurally limited. Further, the shape and range of the end surface on the inner peripheral side of the reinforcing member 24 c are formed so that the operating rod 15 does not interfere with the monitor 7.
 例えば、図7及び図8に示すように、ストッパ部24dすなわち補強部材24の内周側の端面は、平面視で、D字形状に形成されている。これにより、負荷部材42が補強部材24の内周側の端面に沿って移動したときの、負荷部材42の最大可動範囲320も、平面視でD字形状となる(図27参照)。また、上述したように、第1傾動範囲は第2傾動範囲より大きいので、ストッパ部24dによって制限される操作ロッド15の端部の第1最大可動範囲は、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいて制御される操作ロッド15の端部の第2最大可動範囲より、大きい。なお、第2最大可動範囲は、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいて制御される可動フレーム12の可動範囲に対応して、設定される。 For example, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the stopper 24d, that is, the end surface on the inner peripheral side of the reinforcing member 24 is formed in a D shape in plan view. Thereby, the maximum movable range 320 of the load member 42 when the load member 42 moves along the end surface on the inner peripheral side of the reinforcing member 24 also has a D shape in plan view (see FIG. 27). Further, as described above, since the first tilt range is larger than the second tilt range, the first maximum movable range of the end portion of the operating rod 15 limited by the stopper portion 24d is controlled based on the moving range regulation program. It is larger than the second maximum movable range at the end of the operating rod 15. The second maximum movable range is set in correspondence with the movable range of the movable frame 12 controlled based on the movement range restriction program.
 ここで、ストッパ部24dの一部、例えば補強部材24のうちの第3補強部24cは、操作ロッド15の患者Tから見て前方(奥側、図27の左方)への最大傾斜を決定する部分である。言い換えると、第3補強部24cは、操作ロッド15が前方へ傾斜したときの可動フレーム12の可動範囲を、制限する。第3補強部24cは、第1補強部24a及び第2補強部24bより低い位置に設けられており、かつ内周部が第1傾動中心C1側に突出している。このため、負荷部材42が第3補強部24cの突出した部分の内周面に接触したときの操作ロッド15の傾斜角度は、負荷部材42が第1補強部24aの内周面及び第2補強部24bの内周面に接触したときの操作ロッド15の傾斜角度より、小さくなる。ここでは、両者の傾斜角度の差の絶対値は、例えば10度程度に設定されている。このように、操作ロッド15の前方への傾動範囲が、その他の方向の傾動範囲より小さいので、患者Tが操作ロッド15を前方(奥側)に操作し過ぎても、患者Tが椅子4から滑り落ちにくくなり、患者Tの安全性を確保できる。 Here, a part of the stopper portion 24d, for example, the third reinforcing portion 24c of the reinforcing member 24 determines the maximum inclination of the operating rod 15 forward (back side, left side in FIG. 27) when viewed from the patient T. It is a part to do. In other words, the 3rd reinforcement part 24c restrict | limits the movable range of the movable frame 12 when the operating rod 15 inclines ahead. The third reinforcing portion 24c is provided at a position lower than the first reinforcing portion 24a and the second reinforcing portion 24b, and the inner peripheral portion protrudes toward the first tilting center C1. For this reason, the inclination angle of the operation rod 15 when the load member 42 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the protruding portion of the third reinforcing portion 24c is such that the load member 42 has the inner peripheral surface of the first reinforcing portion 24a and the second reinforcing surface. It becomes smaller than the inclination angle of the operating rod 15 when it contacts the inner peripheral surface of the portion 24b. Here, the absolute value of the difference between the inclination angles is set to about 10 degrees, for example. Thus, since the tilting range of the operating rod 15 forward is smaller than the tilting range of other directions, even if the patient T operates the operating rod 15 forward (backward) too much, the patient T moves from the chair 4. It becomes difficult to slip off, and the safety of the patient T can be secured.
 上記のような上肢訓練装置1では、患者Tが操作ロッド15を操作すると、操作ロッド15の傾動に応じて、可動フレーム12が動作する。すると、可動フレーム12の状態角度hが、計算される。そして、可動フレーム12の状態角度hが最大状態角度Hを越えた場合に、傾動抵抗付与機構13が動作を停止し、操作ロッド15は、最大状態角度Hを越えた傾動範囲へ移動不能になる。ここで、患者Tが急激に操作ロッド15を操作し、移動範囲規制プログラムによる制御が追随できなかった場合、操作ロッド15の移動は、最終的に、傾動範囲規制機構20によって規制される。具体的には、操作ロッド15がストッパ部24dに当接することによって、操作ロッド15は動作不能になる。 In the above-described upper limb training apparatus 1, when the patient T operates the operation rod 15, the movable frame 12 operates according to the tilt of the operation rod 15. Then, the state angle h of the movable frame 12 is calculated. When the state angle h of the movable frame 12 exceeds the maximum state angle H, the tilting resistance applying mechanism 13 stops its operation, and the operation rod 15 cannot move to the tilt range exceeding the maximum state angle H. . Here, when the patient T rapidly operates the operation rod 15 and the control by the movement range restriction program cannot follow, the movement of the operation rod 15 is finally restricted by the tilt range restriction mechanism 20. Specifically, the operation rod 15 becomes inoperable when the operation rod 15 contacts the stopper portion 24d.
 上記のように、この上肢訓練装置1では、患者Tによって操作ロッド15が手で操作されている間は、制御部110は、可動フレーム12の可動範囲を制限しながら、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲を制御している。このため、患者Tが、操作ロッド15を必要以上に大きく操作してしまったとしても、操作ロッド15は、患者Tが安全に操作できる範囲を逸脱して、動作することができない。このように、本上肢訓練装置1では、可動フレーム12の可動範囲を制御部110によって制限することによって、患者Tが安全に訓練できるようにしている。 As described above, in the upper limb training apparatus 1, while the operation rod 15 is being manually operated by the patient T, the control unit 110 restricts the movable range of the movable frame 12 and restricts the tilting range of the operation rod 15. Is controlling. For this reason, even if the patient T has operated the operation rod 15 larger than necessary, the operation rod 15 cannot operate outside the range in which the patient T can safely operate. As described above, in the upper limb training apparatus 1, the movable range of the movable frame 12 is limited by the control unit 110 so that the patient T can safely train.
 また、この上肢訓練装置1では、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲がストッパ部24dによって構造的に制限されるので、患者Tが、操作ロッド15を必要以上に大きく操作してしまったとしても、操作ロッド15は、患者Tが安全に操作できる範囲を逸脱して、動作することができない。このように、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲をストッパ部24dによって制限することによって、患者Tが安全に訓練できるようにしている。
 特に、この上肢訓練装置1では、ストッパ部24dが、操作ロッド15の患者Tから見て前方への最大傾斜を決定している。このため、患者Tが、操作ロッド15を必要以上に前方に大きく操作してしまったとしても、患者Tは前のめりに倒れることなく安全に訓練できる。
Moreover, in this upper limb training apparatus 1, since the tilting range of the operation rod 15 is structurally limited by the stopper portion 24d, even if the patient T operates the operation rod 15 more than necessary, the operation rod 15 15 cannot operate outside the range that the patient T can safely operate. Thus, the patient T can be safely trained by limiting the tilting range of the operating rod 15 by the stopper portion 24d.
In particular, in the upper limb training apparatus 1, the stopper portion 24 d determines the maximum forward tilt of the operation rod 15 as viewed from the patient T. For this reason, even if the patient T has operated the operation rod 15 largely forwards more than necessary, the patient T can safely train without falling forward.
 また、この上肢訓練装置1では、ストッパ部24dの直線状の部分を、ストッパ部24dの他の部分と比較して、床面側に下げて設けることによって、操作ロッド15の前方への最大傾斜を小さく設定している。これにより、患者Tが、操作ロッド15を必要以上に前方(奥側)に大きく操作してしまったとしても、操作ロッド15は最大傾斜より大きく前方(奥側)へ移動することができないので、患者Tは安全に訓練できる。 Further, in this upper limb training apparatus 1, the linear portion of the stopper portion 24d is provided lower than the other portion of the stopper portion 24d on the floor surface side, so that the maximum inclination of the operation rod 15 forward is achieved. Is set smaller. Thereby, even if the patient T has operated the operation rod 15 forward (back side) more than necessary, the operation rod 15 cannot move forward (back side) larger than the maximum inclination. Patient T can be safely trained.
 また、この上肢訓練装置1では、操作ロッド15の端部の最大可動範囲が、平面視でD字形状になっている。このため、例えば、D字の直線部を、操作ロッド15の前方(奥側)への移動を制限する部分に設定した場合、操作ロッド15の前方への移動は、一律に同じ位置で制限される。さらに、操作ロッド15の左右及び後方(手前側)の制限は、ストッパ部24dの曲線に沿うように形成されている。このように、操作ロッド15の端部の最大可動範囲を設定することによって、患者Tは、操作ロッド15を安全かつスムースに動作させることができる。 Moreover, in this upper limb training apparatus 1, the maximum movable range of the end portion of the operating rod 15 is D-shaped in plan view. For this reason, for example, when the D-shaped linear portion is set as a portion that restricts the forward movement (back side) of the operation rod 15, the forward movement of the operation rod 15 is uniformly restricted at the same position. The Furthermore, the right and left and rear (front side) restrictions of the operating rod 15 are formed along the curve of the stopper portion 24d. Thus, by setting the maximum movable range of the end of the operating rod 15, the patient T can operate the operating rod 15 safely and smoothly.
 また、この上肢訓練装置1では、操作ロッド15の傾動範囲は、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいて制限された上で、移動範囲規制機構20によってさらに制限されている。すなわち、患者Tが操作ロッド15を操作したときに、まず、移動範囲規制プログラムに基づいて操作ロッド15の傾動範囲をソフトウェア的に制限し、次に、傾動範囲規制機構20により操作ロッド15の傾動範囲を構造的に制限している。これにより、患者Tが急激に操作ロッド15を操作した場合等に、移動範囲規制プログラムによる制御が追随できなかったとしても、傾動範囲規制機構20によって操作ロッド15の移動を確実に規制できる。 Further, in this upper limb training apparatus 1, the tilting range of the operation rod 15 is further limited by the moving range restricting mechanism 20 after being restricted based on the moving range restricting program. That is, when the patient T operates the operation rod 15, first, the tilt range of the operation rod 15 is limited by software based on the movement range restriction program, and then the tilt of the operation rod 15 is tilted by the tilt range restriction mechanism 20. The range is structurally limited. Thereby, even when the patient T suddenly operates the operation rod 15 and the control by the movement range restriction program cannot follow, the movement of the operation rod 15 can be reliably restricted by the tilt range restriction mechanism 20.
 さらに、この上肢訓練装置1では、可動フレーム12の前方(奥側)への最大可動範囲は、操作ロッド15がモニタに干渉しないようにも設定されているので、患者Tが、操作ロッド15を必要以上に大きく操作してしまったとしても、患者Tの手がモニタに衝突するおそれがない。 Furthermore, in this upper limb training apparatus 1, the maximum movable range to the front (back side) of the movable frame 12 is also set so that the operation rod 15 does not interfere with the monitor. Even if the operation is performed more than necessary, there is no possibility that the hand of the patient T collides with the monitor.
 上肢訓練装置1では、様々なタイプの複数のアタッチメントATが用いられ、図23に示すように、各アタッチメントATは、複数の接点端子159を有している。図23では、アタッチメントATの底面側の外形を2点鎖線で示し、底面に備えられた複数の接点端子159を実線で示している。各接点端子159は、後述する複数のピン端子84aそれぞれに対応している。すなわち、各接点端子159と、各接点端子159に対応するピン端子84aとが互いに接触可能に、複数の接点端子159は、アタッチメントATに設けられている。 In the upper limb training apparatus 1, a plurality of attachments AT of various types are used, and each attachment AT has a plurality of contact terminals 159 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 23, the outer shape of the bottom surface side of the attachment AT is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and a plurality of contact terminals 159 provided on the bottom surface are indicated by solid lines. Each contact terminal 159 corresponds to each of a plurality of pin terminals 84a described later. That is, the plurality of contact terminals 159 are provided in the attachment AT so that the contact terminals 159 and the pin terminals 84a corresponding to the contact terminals 159 can contact each other.
 また、複数のアタッチメントATそれぞれにおいて、複数の接点端子159の中の所定の2つの接点端子159が、短絡している。また、複数のアタッチメントATそれぞれにおいて短絡する2つの接点端子159の組み合わせは、異なっている。すなわち、複数のアタッチメントATそれぞれにおいて2つの接点端子159が短絡するパターン(短絡パターン)が異なるように、複数の接点端子159は各アタッチメントATに設けられている。 In each of the plurality of attachments AT, two predetermined contact terminals 159 among the plurality of contact terminals 159 are short-circuited. The combination of the two contact terminals 159 that are short-circuited in each of the plurality of attachments AT is different. That is, the plurality of contact terminals 159 are provided in each attachment AT so that the pattern (short circuit pattern) in which the two contact terminals 159 are short-circuited in each of the plurality of attachments AT is different.
 図23では、5個を1組として2列に並べた10個の接点端子159が、アタッチメントATに設けられている。また、ある列のいずれか1個の接点端子159と、他の列のいずれか1個の接点端子159とが、短絡している。この短絡パターンは、アタッチメントATごとに異なっている。図23は、各列の中央の接点端子159に隣接する接点端子159が互いに短絡した状態の図が、示されている。 In FIG. 23, ten contact terminals 159 arranged in two rows of five as one set are provided in the attachment AT. In addition, any one contact terminal 159 in a certain row and any one contact terminal 159 in the other row are short-circuited. This short-circuit pattern is different for each attachment AT. FIG. 23 shows a state in which the contact terminals 159 adjacent to the center contact terminal 159 in each row are short-circuited to each other.
 アタッチメント取付部59は、患者Tの訓練プログラムに応じたアタッチメントATを着脱可能に取り付けるためのものであり、可動ステイ50の上端部に取り付けられる。アタッチメント取付部59には、伸縮操作力検出機構17が取り付けられている。
 アタッチメント取付部59は、図23及び図24に示すように、可動ステイ50に装着される装着部材70と、装着部材70に軸方向に移動自在に装着される軸移動許可部材80と、装着部材70と軸移動許可部材80との間に配置されるすべり軸受90と、可動ステイ50に対する軸方向以外の力(off-axis force)を吸収する弾性部材94(吸収部材)と、弾性部材94を位置決めするための複数の位置決め部材95と、伸縮操作力検出機構17において操作ロッド15に加わる上下Z方向の操作力を検出する際の基準となる基準部材88とを有している。
The attachment attachment portion 59 is for detachably attaching the attachment AT corresponding to the training program for the patient T, and is attached to the upper end portion of the movable stay 50. The expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 is attached to the attachment attachment portion 59.
As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the attachment attachment portion 59 includes an attachment member 70 attached to the movable stay 50, an axial movement permission member 80 attached to the attachment member 70 so as to be movable in the axial direction, and an attachment member. A sliding bearing 90 disposed between the shaft 70 and the shaft movement permission member 80, an elastic member 94 (absorbing member) that absorbs a force (off-axis force) other than the axial direction with respect to the movable stay 50, and an elastic member 94 A plurality of positioning members 95 for positioning, and a reference member 88 serving as a reference when detecting an operation force in the vertical Z direction applied to the operation rod 15 in the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 are provided.
 装着部材70は、可動ステイ50に装着されるステイ装着部71と、ステイ装着部71に設けられる軸部72とを有している。ステイ装着部71は、円板状に形成された円板部71aと、円板部71aの面外に下向きに突出して一体に形成された一対の矩形板部71b(図23及び図24には1つのみ表示)とを有している。円板部71aは、中央部に貫通孔71cが形成されている。一対の矩形板部71bは、互いに対向して形成されている。各矩形板部71bには、複数のボルト孔例えば4つのボルト孔が、形成されており、可動ステイ50にも、このボルト孔に対応するボルト孔が形成されている。装着部材70は、各矩形板部71bのボルト孔及び可動ステイ50のボルト孔にボルト部材を挿通し、このボルト部材にナット部材を螺合することによって、装着部材70は可動ステイ50に装着される。 The mounting member 70 has a stay mounting portion 71 mounted on the movable stay 50 and a shaft portion 72 provided on the stay mounting portion 71. The stay mounting portion 71 includes a disc portion 71a formed in a disc shape, and a pair of rectangular plate portions 71b (see FIGS. 23 and 24) that are integrally formed to protrude downward from the surface of the disc portion 71a. Only one is displayed). The disc portion 71a has a through hole 71c formed at the center. The pair of rectangular plate portions 71b are formed to face each other. Each rectangular plate portion 71 b is formed with a plurality of bolt holes, for example, four bolt holes, and the movable stay 50 is also formed with bolt holes corresponding to the bolt holes. The mounting member 70 is mounted on the movable stay 50 by inserting a bolt member into the bolt hole of each rectangular plate portion 71 b and the bolt hole of the movable stay 50 and screwing a nut member into the bolt member. The
 軸部72は、円筒状に形成された軸部本体72aと、軸部本体72aの下端側において外周に一体に形成された軸部用の鍔部72bとを有している。軸部本体72aの下端をステイ装着部71の貫通孔71cに嵌合し、軸部用の鍔部72bをステイ装着部71の円板部71aに当接させることにより、軸部72は装着部材70に装着される。 The shaft portion 72 includes a shaft portion main body 72a formed in a cylindrical shape, and a flange portion 72b for the shaft portion integrally formed on the outer periphery on the lower end side of the shaft portion main body 72a. By fitting the lower end of the shaft portion main body 72a into the through hole 71c of the stay mounting portion 71 and bringing the flange portion 72b for the shaft portion into contact with the disc portion 71a of the stay mounting portion 71, the shaft portion 72 is attached to the mounting member. 70.
 軸移動許可部材80は、軸部72に摺動自在に装着される筒状部81と、筒状部81を覆う外装部82とを有している。筒状部81は、下端側に形成された環状溝部81aと、上端側に形成された筒状部用の第1鍔部81bと、筒状部用の第1鍔部81bから一端側に所定の間隔を隔てて形成された筒状部用の第2鍔部81cと、内周面に形成された段差部81dとを有している。 The shaft movement permission member 80 has a cylindrical portion 81 that is slidably mounted on the shaft portion 72 and an exterior portion 82 that covers the cylindrical portion 81. The cylindrical portion 81 has an annular groove portion 81a formed on the lower end side, a first flange portion 81b for the cylindrical portion formed on the upper end side, and a predetermined portion on one end side from the first flange portion 81b for the cylindrical portion. The second flange portion 81c for the cylindrical portion formed with an interval of and the step portion 81d formed on the inner peripheral surface.
 外装部82は、外装部本体83と、アタッチメントATの種類を識別するための端子が装着される端子装着部材84と、カバー部材85と、アタッチメントATを取り付けるための複数のピン部材86とを有している。外装部本体83は、平面視で円状に形成されている。外装部本体83は、凹んだ円状の第1段差部83aと、第1段差部83aの底部中央において第1段差部83aより小径で凹んで形成される第2段差部83bと、第2段差部83bの底部中央に形成される貫通孔83cとを有している。第2段差部83bには、軸移動許可部材80の第1鍔部81bが嵌合される。より具体的には、第2段差部83bの壁部には、軸移動許可部材80の第1鍔部81bの外周面が嵌合され、第2段差部83bの底部には、軸移動許可部材80の第1鍔部81bの端部側の面が当接させられる。 The exterior portion 82 includes an exterior portion main body 83, a terminal attachment member 84 to which a terminal for identifying the type of the attachment AT is attached, a cover member 85, and a plurality of pin members 86 for attaching the attachment AT. is doing. The exterior body 83 is formed in a circular shape in plan view. The exterior portion main body 83 includes a concave circular first step portion 83a, a second step portion 83b formed to be recessed with a smaller diameter than the first step portion 83a at the bottom center of the first step portion 83a, and a second step. And a through hole 83c formed in the center of the bottom of the portion 83b. The first flange portion 81b of the shaft movement permission member 80 is fitted to the second step portion 83b. More specifically, the outer peripheral surface of the first flange portion 81b of the shaft movement permission member 80 is fitted to the wall portion of the second step portion 83b, and the shaft movement permission member is disposed to the bottom of the second step portion 83b. The surface on the end side of the first first flange portion 81b of 80 is brought into contact.
 端子装着部材84は、平面視で円状に形成されている。端子装着部材84には、複数の端子84a例えば10本のピン端子が、その接点部を上方に露出させた態様で装着されている。ここでは、複数のピン端子84aそれぞれから延びるコードが、端子装着部材84の内部を通過して端子装着部材84の下方に延びている。なお、図24では、コードは一部のみ示している。このような端子装着部材84は、外装部本体83の貫通孔83cに装着される。より具体的には、端子装着部材84においてピン端子84aが露出した面とは反対の面が、軸移動許可部材80において第1鍔部81bが形成された側の端部に対向するように、端子装着部材84は、外装部本体83の貫通孔83cに嵌合される。 The terminal mounting member 84 is formed in a circular shape in plan view. A plurality of terminals 84a, for example, ten pin terminals are mounted on the terminal mounting member 84 in such a manner that their contact portions are exposed upward. Here, the cord extending from each of the plurality of pin terminals 84 a passes through the inside of the terminal mounting member 84 and extends below the terminal mounting member 84. In FIG. 24, only a part of the code is shown. Such a terminal mounting member 84 is mounted in the through hole 83 c of the exterior body 83. More specifically, the surface of the terminal mounting member 84 opposite to the surface where the pin terminal 84a is exposed faces the end of the shaft movement permission member 80 on the side where the first flange portion 81b is formed. The terminal mounting member 84 is fitted into the through hole 83 c of the exterior body 83.
 カバー部材85は、外装部本体83より大径の筒状に形成されている。カバー部材85の上方の開口側には、環状鍔部85aが一体に形成されている。この環状鍔部85aの内周面を、外装部本体83の外周面に嵌合させることにより、カバー部材85が外装部本体83に装着される。また、カバー部材85の内周面には、位置決め部材95を装着するための環状溝部85bが形成されている。複数のピン部材86は、アタッチメントATに下面から凹んで形成された装着穴に嵌合される。これにより、アタッチメントATが、外装部82すなわちアタッチメント取付部59に装着される。複数のピン部材86例えば2本のピン部材は、外装部本体83に装着されている。 The cover member 85 is formed in a cylindrical shape having a larger diameter than the exterior body 83. On the opening side above the cover member 85, an annular flange 85a is integrally formed. The cover member 85 is attached to the exterior part main body 83 by fitting the inner peripheral surface of the annular flange 85 a to the outer peripheral surface of the exterior part main body 83. In addition, an annular groove 85 b for mounting the positioning member 95 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85. The plurality of pin members 86 are fitted into mounting holes formed in the attachment AT so as to be recessed from the lower surface. As a result, the attachment AT is attached to the exterior portion 82, that is, the attachment attachment portion 59. A plurality of pin members 86, for example, two pin members are attached to the exterior body 83.
 すべり軸受90は、軸移動許可部材80を装着部材70に対して摺動させるためのものである。すべり軸受90は、装着部材70の軸部72と軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81との間に配置される。より具体的には、すべり軸受90は、円筒状に形成されており、軸移動許可部材80における筒状部81の内周面に形成された段差部81dに、嵌合される。この状態において、すべり軸受90の内周面を装着部材70の軸部72の外周面に摺動自在に装着することによって、軸移動許可部材80が装着部材70に対して軸方向(上下)に移動可能にしている。なお、すべり軸受90は、樹脂性のブッシュである。 The sliding bearing 90 is for sliding the shaft movement permission member 80 with respect to the mounting member 70. The slide bearing 90 is disposed between the shaft portion 72 of the mounting member 70 and the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80. More specifically, the slide bearing 90 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is fitted into a stepped portion 81 d formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 81 in the shaft movement permission member 80. In this state, by attaching the inner peripheral surface of the slide bearing 90 to the outer peripheral surface of the shaft portion 72 of the mounting member 70 so as to be slidable, the shaft movement permission member 80 is axially (vertically) with respect to the mounting member 70. It is movable. The sliding bearing 90 is a resin bush.
 複数の位置決め部材95は、弾性部材94を位置決めするためのものである。複数の位置決め部材95は、第1から第4位置決め部材96,97,98,99から構成されている。第1位置決め部材96は、環状の板部材であり、カバー部材85の環状溝部85bに装着される。 The plurality of positioning members 95 are for positioning the elastic member 94. The plurality of positioning members 95 includes first to fourth positioning members 96, 97, 98, and 99. The first positioning member 96 is an annular plate member and is attached to the annular groove 85 b of the cover member 85.
 一対の第2位置決め部材97(97a,97b)は、後述する複数の弾性部材94の間に配置される。例えば、一方の第2位置決め部材97aは、筒状に形成されている。この第2位置決め部材97aは、カバー部材85の内周面に装着される。より具体的には、第2位置決め部材97aに形成された凹部を、カバー部材85の内周面に形成された凸部(図示しない)に嵌合することによって、第2位置決め部材97aは、カバー部材85の内周面に装着される。他方の第2位置決め部材97bは、筒状に形成されている。他方の第2位置決め部材97bの筒径は、上記の第2位置決め部材97aの筒径より小さい。この第2位置決め部材97bは、軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81の外周面に装着される。 The pair of second positioning members 97 (97a, 97b) are disposed between a plurality of elastic members 94 described later. For example, one second positioning member 97a is formed in a cylindrical shape. The second positioning member 97a is attached to the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85. More specifically, the second positioning member 97a is formed by fitting a concave portion formed in the second positioning member 97a to a convex portion (not shown) formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85, thereby Attached to the inner peripheral surface of the member 85. The other second positioning member 97b is formed in a cylindrical shape. The cylinder diameter of the other second positioning member 97b is smaller than the cylinder diameter of the second positioning member 97a. The second positioning member 97b is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80.
 以下では、カバー部材85側に配置された第2位置決め部材97aを、外周側の第2位置決め部材と呼び、軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81側に配置された第2位置決め部材97bを、内周側の第2位置決め部材と呼ぶ。 Hereinafter, the second positioning member 97a disposed on the cover member 85 side is referred to as a second positioning member on the outer peripheral side, and the second positioning member 97b disposed on the tubular portion 81 side of the shaft movement permission member 80 is This is called an inner peripheral second positioning member.
 一対の第3位置決め部材98(98a,98b)は、筒状部81の下端側例えば筒状部81の環状溝部81a側に配置される弾性部材94(94b)と、装着部材70のステイ装着部71との間に配置される。例えば、一方の第3位置決め部材98aは、筒状に形成されている。この一方の第3位置決め部材98aは、カバー部材85の内周面に装着される。より具体的には、一方の第3位置決め部材98aに形成された凹部を、カバー部材85の内周面に形成された凸部(図示しない)に嵌合することによって、一方の第3位置決め部材98aは、カバー部材85の内周面に装着される。 The pair of third positioning members 98 (98a, 98b) includes an elastic member 94 (94b) disposed on the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 81, for example, on the annular groove portion 81a side of the cylindrical portion 81, and a stay mounting portion of the mounting member 70. 71. For example, one third positioning member 98a is formed in a cylindrical shape. The one third positioning member 98 a is attached to the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85. More specifically, one third positioning member is formed by fitting a concave portion formed on one third positioning member 98a to a convex portion (not shown) formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85. 98 a is attached to the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 85.
 他方の第3位置決め部材98bは、円環状に形成されている。他方の第3位置決め部材98bの環径は、上記の一方の第3位置決め部材98aの筒径より小さい。他方の第3位置決め部材98bは、軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81の外周面に装着される。詳細には、他方の第3位置決め部材98bは、筒状部81の環状溝部81a側(下端側)に配置される弾性部材94(94b)と、基準部材88との間において、軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81の外周面に装着される。 The other third positioning member 98b is formed in an annular shape. The ring diameter of the other third positioning member 98b is smaller than the cylinder diameter of the one third positioning member 98a. The other third positioning member 98 b is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80. Specifically, the other third positioning member 98 b is an axial movement permission member between the elastic member 94 (94 b) disposed on the annular groove 81 a side (lower end side) of the cylindrical portion 81 and the reference member 88. Attached to the outer peripheral surface of 80 cylindrical portions 81.
 以下では、カバー部材85側に配置された第3位置決め部材98aを、外周側の第3位置決め部材と呼び、軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81側に配置された第3位置決め部材98を、内周側の第3位置決め部材と呼ぶ。 Below, the 3rd positioning member 98a arrange | positioned at the cover member 85 side is called the 3rd positioning member of an outer peripheral side, and the 3rd positioning member 98 arrange | positioned at the cylindrical part 81 side of the axial movement permission member 80 is used. This is referred to as an inner peripheral third positioning member.
 第4位置決め部材99は、筒状部81の下端側に装着される。例えば、第4位置決め部材99は、環状に形成されており、筒状部81の外周面に装着される。より具体的には、第4位置決め部材99は、例えばC型止め輪であり、筒状部81の環状溝部81aに嵌合される。 The fourth positioning member 99 is attached to the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 81. For example, the fourth positioning member 99 is formed in an annular shape and is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 81. More specifically, the fourth positioning member 99 is, for example, a C-type retaining ring, and is fitted into the annular groove portion 81 a of the tubular portion 81.
 基準部材88は、伸縮操作力検出機構17において操作ロッド15に加わる上下Z方向の操作力を検出する際の基準となる部材である。基準部材88には、後述する伸縮操作力検出機構17の軸変位検出部17aが接触している。基準部材88は、環状に形成されている。内周側の第3位置決め部材98bと第4位置決め部材99との間において、基準部材88の中央部に形成された貫通孔に、軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81を挿通することによって、基準部材88が軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81の外周面に装着される。また、基準部材88と内周側の第3位置決め部材98bとの間には、調節部材89が装着されている。この調節部材89によって、基準部材88のガタを防止している。 The reference member 88 is a member that serves as a reference when detecting the operation force in the vertical Z direction applied to the operation rod 15 in the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17. The reference member 88 is in contact with an axial displacement detector 17a of an expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 described later. The reference member 88 is formed in an annular shape. By inserting the tubular portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80 into the through hole formed in the central portion of the reference member 88 between the third positioning member 98b on the inner peripheral side and the fourth positioning member 99, A reference member 88 is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80. An adjustment member 89 is mounted between the reference member 88 and the third positioning member 98b on the inner peripheral side. The adjustment member 89 prevents the reference member 88 from being loose.
 弾性部材94は、可動ステイ50に対する軸方向以外の力(off-axis force)を吸収するためのものである。弾性部材94は、複数の弾性部材から構成されており、複数の弾性部材94は、筒状部81と外装部82との間において、軸方向に所定の間隔を隔てて配置される。弾性部材94は、渦巻きバネ例えば板状の渦巻きバネである。複数の弾性部材94は、2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bから構成されている。ここでは、2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bが軸方向に所定の間隔を隔てて配置されているので、これら板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bによって、軸方向に交差する方向の力やモーメント発生時の力等を、確実に吸収できる。 The elastic member 94 is for absorbing a force (off-axis force) other than the axial direction with respect to the movable stay 50. The elastic member 94 is composed of a plurality of elastic members, and the plurality of elastic members 94 are arranged between the cylindrical portion 81 and the exterior portion 82 at a predetermined interval in the axial direction. The elastic member 94 is a spiral spring, for example, a plate-shaped spiral spring. The plurality of elastic members 94 includes two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b. Here, since the two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b are arranged at a predetermined interval in the axial direction, the plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b can generate a force in a direction intersecting the axial direction. The force at the time of moment generation can be absorbed reliably.
 2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bは同一形状のものであり、表裏反転して、筒状部81と外装部82との間において、軸方向に所定の間隔を隔てて配置される。2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bそれぞれは、位置決め部材95を介して、筒状部81と外装部82との間に配置される。 The two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b have the same shape, and are turned upside down and arranged between the tubular portion 81 and the exterior portion 82 at a predetermined interval in the axial direction. Each of the two plate-like spiral springs 94 a and 94 b is disposed between the cylindrical portion 81 and the exterior portion 82 via the positioning member 95.
 より具体的には、一方(上側)の板状の渦巻きバネ94aは、その外周縁を、外周側の第2位置決め部材97aと第1位置決め部材96との間で挟持されている。また、一方の板状の渦巻きバネ94aは、その内周縁を、内周側の第2位置決め部材97bと軸移動許可部材80の第2鍔部81cとの間で挟持されている。他方(下側)の板状の渦巻きバネ94bは、その外周縁を、外周側の第2位置決め部材97aと外周側の第3位置決め部材98aとの間で挟持されている。また、他方の板状の渦巻きバネ94bは、その内周縁を、内周側の第2位置決め部材97bと内周側の第3位置決め部材98bとの間で挟持されている。 More specifically, one (upper) plate-like spiral spring 94a has its outer peripheral edge clamped between the second positioning member 97a and the first positioning member 96 on the outer peripheral side. In addition, one plate-like spiral spring 94 a has its inner peripheral edge clamped between the second positioning member 97 b on the inner peripheral side and the second flange 81 c of the axial movement permission member 80. The other (lower) plate-like spiral spring 94b has its outer peripheral edge clamped between the outer peripheral second positioning member 97a and the outer peripheral third positioning member 98a. The other plate-like spiral spring 94b has its inner peripheral edge sandwiched between the inner peripheral second positioning member 97b and the inner peripheral third positioning member 98b.
 このように、2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bの外周部は、外周側の第2位置決め部材97a、及び外周側の第3位置決め部材98aによって、位置決めされている。また、2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bの内周部は、内周側の第2位置決め部材97b、及び内周側の第3位置決め部材98bによって、位置決めされている。さらに、2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bの内周部は、調節部材89及び基準部材88を介して、第4位置決め部材99によって軸方向の移動が規制されている。 As described above, the outer peripheral portions of the two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b are positioned by the second positioning member 97a on the outer peripheral side and the third positioning member 98a on the outer peripheral side. The inner peripheral portions of the two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b are positioned by an inner peripheral second positioning member 97b and an inner peripheral third positioning member 98b. Further, the axial movement of the inner peripheral portions of the two plate-like spiral springs 94 a and 94 b is restricted by the fourth positioning member 99 via the adjustment member 89 and the reference member 88.
 アタッチメント取付部59にアタッチメントATが装着された状態で、アタッチメントATに固有の信号を識別する信号受信部184は、制御部110に含まれている。信号受信部184は、例えば、後述する導通バターンを識別する。 The signal receiving unit 184 for identifying a signal unique to the attachment AT in a state where the attachment AT is attached to the attachment mounting unit 59 is included in the control unit 110. For example, the signal receiving unit 184 identifies a conduction pattern described later.
 前記したように、アタッチメント取付部59は複数のピン端子84aをさらに有しており、各ピン端子84aは、上述した複数の接点端子159それぞれに対応している。すなわち、各ピン端子84aと、各ピン端子84aに対応する接点端子159とが互いに接触可能に、複数のピン端子84aは、アタッチメント取付部59に設けられている。具体的には、複数のピン端子84a例えば10個のピン端子は、端子装着部材84の上面から外方に突出するように、端子装着部材84に装着されている。ここでは、図23及び図24に示すように、5個を1組として2列に並べた10個のピン端子84aが、端子装着部材84に設けられている。この場合、アタッチメントATがアタッチメント取付部59に装着されたときに、10個のピン端子84aが、上述した10個の接点端子159に接触する。 As described above, the attachment mounting portion 59 further includes a plurality of pin terminals 84a, and each pin terminal 84a corresponds to each of the plurality of contact terminals 159 described above. That is, the plurality of pin terminals 84a are provided in the attachment mounting portion 59 so that each pin terminal 84a and the contact terminal 159 corresponding to each pin terminal 84a can contact each other. Specifically, the plurality of pin terminals 84a, for example, 10 pin terminals are mounted on the terminal mounting member 84 so as to protrude outward from the upper surface of the terminal mounting member 84. Here, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, ten pin terminals 84 a arranged in two rows with five as one set are provided on the terminal mounting member 84. In this case, when the attachment AT is attached to the attachment attachment portion 59, the ten pin terminals 84a come into contact with the ten contact terminals 159 described above.
 このように、アタッチメントATがアタッチメント取付部59に取り付けられると、アタッチメントATでは所定の2つの接点端子159が短絡しているので、これら2つの接点端子159に接触した2つのピン端子84a間で導通する。図23では、短絡した2つの接点端子159それぞれと、これら2つの接点端子159それぞれに接触するピン端子84aとが、一点鎖線で連結されている。すると、この導通パターンに対応したアタッチメントATに固有の信号が、信号受信部184において識別される。すると、制御部110は、この信号に基づいて、アタッチメントATの種類を判定する。そして、制御部110は、信号に基づいて判定したアタッチメントATの種類に応じて、上肢訓練プログラムを起動し、上肢訓練プログラムに基づいて、上肢訓練装置を制御する。 As described above, when the attachment AT is attached to the attachment attachment portion 59, since two predetermined contact terminals 159 are short-circuited in the attachment AT, conduction is established between the two pin terminals 84a that are in contact with the two contact terminals 159. To do. In FIG. 23, each of the two short-circuited contact terminals 159 and the pin terminal 84a that contacts each of the two contact terminals 159 are connected by a one-dot chain line. Then, a signal specific to the attachment AT corresponding to this conduction pattern is identified by the signal receiving unit 184. Then, the control part 110 determines the kind of attachment AT based on this signal. And the control part 110 starts an upper limb training program according to the kind of attachment AT determined based on the signal, and controls an upper limb training apparatus based on an upper limb training program.
 上記のように、本上肢訓練装置1では、アタッチメントATがアタッチメント取付部59に装着されたときに、アタッチメントATに固有の信号がアタッチメント取付部59の信号受信部184に識別されるので、この信号によって、アタッチメント取付部59に装着されたアタッチメントATを識別できる。ここでアタッチメント取付部59に装着されたアタッチメントATさえ識別することができれば、制御部110は、アタッチメントATに対応する上肢訓練プログラムは自動的に選択できる。このように、本上肢訓練装置1では、アタッチメントATに対応した上肢訓練プログラムを確実に又は自動的に選択できる。このため、医師及び作業療法士は、アタッチメントATをアタッチメント取付部59に装着するだけで、アタッチメントATに対応する訓練プログラムを自動的に実行できる。これにより、医師及び作業療法士によって選択されたアタッチメントATを用いた最適な上肢訓練を、患者は実行できる。 As described above, in the upper limb training apparatus 1, when the attachment AT is attached to the attachment attachment portion 59, a signal unique to the attachment AT is identified by the signal reception portion 184 of the attachment attachment portion 59. Thus, the attachment AT attached to the attachment attachment portion 59 can be identified. If only the attachment AT attached to the attachment attachment portion 59 can be identified, the control unit 110 can automatically select the upper limb training program corresponding to the attachment AT. As described above, the upper limb training apparatus 1 can reliably or automatically select the upper limb training program corresponding to the attachment AT. For this reason, the doctor and the occupational therapist can automatically execute the training program corresponding to the attachment AT only by attaching the attachment AT to the attachment mounting portion 59. Thereby, the patient can perform optimal upper limb training using the attachment AT selected by the doctor and occupational therapist.
 また、この上肢訓練装置1では、制御部110が、アタッチメントATの種類に応じた幾つかの上肢訓練プログラムを抽出して使用者に選択させるか、又は自動的に一つの上肢訓練プログラムを起動して、上肢訓練装置1を制御するので、医師又は作業療法士は、アタッチメントATをアタッチメント取付部59に装着するだけで、アタッチメントATに対応する訓練プログラムを間違えることなく実行できる。これにより、医師及び作業療法士によって選択されたアタッチメントATを用いた最適な上肢訓練を、患者は実行できる。 In this upper limb training apparatus 1, the control unit 110 extracts several upper limb training programs corresponding to the type of the attachment AT and allows the user to select them, or automatically starts one upper limb training program. Since the upper limb training apparatus 1 is controlled, the doctor or occupational therapist can execute the training program corresponding to the attachment AT without mistake by simply attaching the attachment AT to the attachment attachment portion 59. Thereby, the patient can perform optimal upper limb training using the attachment AT selected by the doctor and occupational therapist.
 ロッドカバー48は、図15、図16及び図17に示すように、伸縮機構47を覆いかつ伸縮機構47とともに伸縮する入れ子構造で嵌合する複数(例えば3つ)のカバー要素からなるカバー構造65を有している。具体的には、この実施形態では、カバー要素は、上カバー要素65aと、上カバー要素65aの内周側に嵌合する中間カバー要素65bと、中間カバー要素65bの内周面に嵌合する下カバー要素65cと、である。 As shown in FIGS. 15, 16, and 17, the rod cover 48 includes a cover structure 65 including a plurality of (for example, three) cover elements that cover the expansion / contraction mechanism 47 and are fitted in a nested structure that expands / contracts with the expansion / contraction mechanism 47. have. Specifically, in this embodiment, the cover element is fitted to the upper cover element 65a, the intermediate cover element 65b fitted to the inner peripheral side of the upper cover element 65a, and the inner peripheral surface of the intermediate cover element 65b. A lower cover element 65c.
 上カバー要素65aは、可動ステイ50の上端に固定される最大径のカバー要素である。中間カバー要素65bは、上カバー要素65aとともに伸縮する中間径のカバー要素である。下カバー要素65cは、中間カバー要素65bの内周側に嵌合する最小径のカバー要素である。下カバー要素65cに嵌合する中間カバー要素65bの外周面には、下端縁から上方に向けて厚みを増すテーパ面65dが形成されている。これにより、操作ロッド15が下端位置に配置され、図16に示すように、上カバー要素65a、中間カバー要素65b及び下カバー要素65cが重なって配置されても、中間カバー要素65bの下端と外装カバー18の第1移動カバー201との間に患者Tの指が挟まれなくなる。下カバー要素65cは、固定ステイ49に固定されている。 The upper cover element 65 a is a cover element having the maximum diameter that is fixed to the upper end of the movable stay 50. The intermediate cover element 65b is an intermediate diameter cover element that expands and contracts together with the upper cover element 65a. The lower cover element 65c is a cover element having a minimum diameter that fits on the inner peripheral side of the intermediate cover element 65b. On the outer peripheral surface of the intermediate cover element 65b fitted to the lower cover element 65c, a tapered surface 65d that increases in thickness from the lower end edge upward is formed. As a result, the operation rod 15 is arranged at the lower end position, and as shown in FIG. 16, even if the upper cover element 65a, the intermediate cover element 65b, and the lower cover element 65c are arranged to overlap, the lower end of the intermediate cover element 65b and the exterior The finger of the patient T is not pinched between the first moving cover 201 of the cover 18. The lower cover element 65 c is fixed to the fixed stay 49.
 上カバー要素65a、中間カバー要素65b及び下カバー要素65cは、図17、図18、図19及び図20に示すように、それぞれ縦に二分割可能な構造である。二分割された上カバー要素65aはネジにより可動ステイ50に連結されている。二分割された中間カバー要素65bは、上カバー要素65aに吊り下げ状態に弾性的に連結されている。二分割された下カバー要素65cは、弾性的に固定ステイ49に連結されている。中間カバー要素65bの上端外周面は、上カバー要素65aの下端の内周面に係合している。これにより、操作ロッド15の伸長時に、上カバー要素65aの下端が中間カバー要素65bに上端近傍に上昇すると、上カバー要素65aとともに中間カバー要素65bが上昇する。また、操作ロッド15の収縮時に、中間カバー要素65bが下降端に到達すると、上カバー要素65aだけが下降する。 The upper cover element 65a, the intermediate cover element 65b, and the lower cover element 65c have a structure that can be vertically divided into two as shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 19, and 20, respectively. The divided upper cover element 65a is connected to the movable stay 50 by screws. The divided intermediate cover element 65b is elastically connected to the upper cover element 65a in a suspended state. The divided lower cover element 65 c is elastically connected to the fixed stay 49. The upper outer peripheral surface of the intermediate cover element 65b is engaged with the inner peripheral surface of the lower end of the upper cover element 65a. As a result, when the lower end of the upper cover element 65a rises in the vicinity of the upper end of the intermediate cover element 65b when the operation rod 15 is extended, the intermediate cover element 65b rises together with the upper cover element 65a. Further, when the intermediate cover element 65b reaches the lower end when the operation rod 15 is contracted, only the upper cover element 65a is lowered.
 図15及び図16に示すように、下カバー要素65c及び中間カバー要素65bの外周面には、操作ロッド15の伸長長さを示すための第1目盛り66a及び第2目盛り66bが表記されている。例えば、下カバー要素65cには、「H1,H2,H3・・・」の第1目盛り66aが表記され、中間カバー要素65bには、「L0,L1,L2,L3・・・」の第2目盛り66bが表記されている。第1目盛り66aと第2目盛り66bと用いることにより、操作ロッド15の伸縮量を容易に把握でき、患者Tの体格及び訓練内容等に応じた上肢の訓練高さの設定が容易になる。 As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, on the outer peripheral surfaces of the lower cover element 65c and the intermediate cover element 65b, a first scale 66a and a second scale 66b for indicating the extension length of the operation rod 15 are written. . For example, the first scale 66a of “H1, H2, H3...” Is written on the lower cover element 65c, and the second scale of “L0, L1, L2, L3. A scale 66b is shown. By using the first scale 66a and the second scale 66b, the amount of expansion / contraction of the operation rod 15 can be easily grasped, and the training height of the upper limb according to the physique of the patient T, the training content, etc. can be easily set.
 図18に示すように、上カバー要素65aは、円形断面である。しかし、図19に示す中間カバー要素65b及び図20に示す下カバー要素65cは、断面が円の上と左右を直線的に切り欠いた形状の非円形(オーバル形状)である。特に下カバー要素65cは、中間カバー要素65bより左右を大きく切り欠いた形状である。これにより、中間カバー要素65b及び下カバー要素65c間の回り止め及び抜け止めを容易に実現できる。 As shown in FIG. 18, the upper cover element 65a has a circular cross section. However, the intermediate cover element 65b shown in FIG. 19 and the lower cover element 65c shown in FIG. 20 are non-circular (oval shapes) in which the cross section is formed by linearly cutting the top and the left of the circle. In particular, the lower cover element 65c has a shape in which the left and right sides are larger than the intermediate cover element 65b. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent rotation and prevention between the intermediate cover element 65b and the lower cover element 65c.
(2-6)伸縮抵抗付与機構
 図14を参照して、伸縮抵抗付与機構16は、前述したZ軸モータ61を有している。伸縮抵抗付与機構16は、伸縮操作力検出機構17により検出された伸縮操作力に応じて、Z軸モータ61を駆動して操作ロッド15の伸縮操作に抵抗を付与、アシスト又は強制的に可動する。また、伸縮抵抗付与機構16は、訓練高さを調整する目的で、操作ロッド15を伸縮させる伸縮駆動部としても機能する。伸縮抵抗付与機構16のZ軸モータ61は、可動フレーム12の軸支持位置、すなわち、第1ジンバル機構30の回動軸芯X1及び回動軸芯Y1を含む平面より下方に(床面FLに近い位置に)配置されている。すなわち、伸縮駆動部は、第2ジンバル機構40の回動軸芯X2及び回動軸芯Y2も同じ上下Z方向位置であるため、Z軸モータ61は、操作ロッド15の傾動支点位置より床面FLに近い位置に配置されている。Z軸モータ61には、図11に示すように、Z軸方向の位置を検出するためのZ軸ロータリエンコーダ63が設けられている。
(2-6) Stretch Resistance Giving Mechanism Referring to FIG. 14, the stretch resistance imparting mechanism 16 has the Z-axis motor 61 described above. The expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 drives the Z-axis motor 61 according to the expansion / contraction operation force detected by the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 to apply resistance to the expansion / contraction operation of the operation rod 15, and assists or forcibly moves. . In addition, the expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 also functions as an expansion / contraction drive unit that expands / contracts the operation rod 15 for the purpose of adjusting the training height. The Z-axis motor 61 of the expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 is located below the plane supporting position of the movable frame 12, that is, the plane including the rotation axis X1 and the rotation axis Y1 of the first gimbal mechanism 30 (on the floor surface FL). It is placed in a close position. That is, in the telescopic drive unit, the rotation axis X2 and the rotation axis Y2 of the second gimbal mechanism 40 are also in the same vertical Z-direction position. It is arranged at a position close to the FL. As shown in FIG. 11, the Z-axis motor 61 is provided with a Z-axis rotary encoder 63 for detecting the position in the Z-axis direction.
 この上肢訓練装置1では、患者Tが上肢を使用して操作ロッド15を例えばアタッチメントATを介して傾動操作する。これにより、傾動抵抗付与機構13により抵抗が付与、アシスト又は強制的に可動された状態で操作ロッド15が傾動する。これにより、患者Tの上肢を訓練できる。この操作ロッド15を伸縮させるための比較的質量が大きいZ軸モータ61が、可動フレーム12が傾動する第1傾動中心C1より床面FLに近い位置、すなわち下方に配置されているので、上肢訓練装置1の重心が低くなるため、訓練装置本体3の設置面積が小さくても上肢訓練装置1が転倒しにくくなる。また、操作ロッド15の傾動で生じるモーメントの中心を第1傾動中心C1に近付けることができるため、機械的負荷を軽減できる。 In the upper limb training apparatus 1, the patient T tilts the operation rod 15 using, for example, the attachment AT using the upper limb. As a result, the operating rod 15 tilts in a state where resistance is applied, assisted, or forcibly moved by the tilt resistance applying mechanism 13. Thereby, the upper limb of the patient T can be trained. Since the Z-axis motor 61 having a relatively large mass for expanding and contracting the operation rod 15 is disposed at a position closer to the floor surface FL than the first tilt center C1 where the movable frame 12 tilts, that is, below, the upper limb training. Since the center of gravity of the apparatus 1 is lowered, the upper limb training apparatus 1 is difficult to fall even if the installation area of the training apparatus body 3 is small. Further, since the center of the moment generated by the tilting of the operating rod 15 can be brought close to the first tilting center C1, the mechanical load can be reduced.
 また、操作ロッド15は、可動フレーム12に第2傾動中心C2から全方向に傾動可能に支持されており、伸縮抵抗付与機構16は、第2傾動中心C2より床面FLに近い位置に配置されている。これにより、上肢訓練装置1がさらに転倒しにくい。
 さらに、第1傾動中心C1と第2傾動中心C2とが、同じ位置に配置されているので、上肢訓練装置1の上下方向の高さを低くできる。
 さらに、Z軸モータ61の出力軸61aは操作ロッド15の伸縮方向に沿って延びており、操作ロッド15のボールネジ軸55は、出力軸61aと同芯にカップリング62により連結され、出力軸61aと一体回転可能である。これにより、Z軸モータ61を含む重量物を操作ロッド15の真下にのみ配置でき、上肢訓練装置1の平面寸法を小さくできる。
The operation rod 15 is supported by the movable frame 12 so as to be tiltable in all directions from the second tilt center C2, and the expansion / contraction resistance applying mechanism 16 is disposed at a position closer to the floor surface FL than the second tilt center C2. ing. Thereby, the upper limb training apparatus 1 is more difficult to fall.
Furthermore, since the 1st tilt center C1 and the 2nd tilt center C2 are arrange | positioned in the same position, the height of the up-down direction of the upper limb training apparatus 1 can be made low.
Further, the output shaft 61a of the Z-axis motor 61 extends along the extending / contracting direction of the operation rod 15, and the ball screw shaft 55 of the operation rod 15 is connected to the output shaft 61a by a coupling 62 so as to be concentric with the output shaft 61a. And can be rotated together. Thereby, the heavy object including the Z-axis motor 61 can be disposed only directly below the operation rod 15, and the planar dimension of the upper limb training apparatus 1 can be reduced.
(2-7)伸縮操作力検出機構
 図11に示すように、伸縮操作力検出機構17は、軸変位検出部17aを有している。軸変位検出部17aは、装着部材70に対する軸移動許可部材80の軸方向の位置を、検出する。軸変位検出部17aは、操作ロッド15の内部に配置されており、装着部材70の基準部材88に接触している。
(2-7) Telescopic Operating Force Detection Mechanism As shown in FIG. 11, the telescopic operating force detection mechanism 17 has an axial displacement detector 17a. The shaft displacement detector 17 a detects the position of the shaft movement permission member 80 in the axial direction with respect to the mounting member 70. The shaft displacement detector 17 a is disposed inside the operation rod 15 and is in contact with the reference member 88 of the mounting member 70.
 軸変位検出部17aは、リニアのポテンショメータを含んでいる。ここでは、リニアのポテンショメータのセンサヘッド17bがばね付勢され、軸移動許可部材80に固定された基準部材88の下面に常に当接している。より具体的には、リニアのポテンショメータ17aのセンサヘッド17bをセンサヘッド17bの外周に配置したコイルばねのバネ力に抗って所定量縮めた状態で、センサヘッド17bは基準部材88の下面にセットされている。この状態のセンサヘッド17bの位置が、センサヘッド17bの初期位置に設定されている。 The shaft displacement detector 17a includes a linear potentiometer. Here, the sensor head 17 b of the linear potentiometer is spring-biased and is always in contact with the lower surface of the reference member 88 fixed to the shaft movement permission member 80. More specifically, the sensor head 17b is set on the lower surface of the reference member 88 in a state where the sensor head 17b of the linear potentiometer 17a is contracted by a predetermined amount against the spring force of the coil spring disposed on the outer periphery of the sensor head 17b. Has been. The position of the sensor head 17b in this state is set to the initial position of the sensor head 17b.
 この初期位置を基準として、軸移動許可部材80が装着部材70に対して軸方向に移動すると、この軸方向への移動に追随して、センサヘッド17bは軸方向に伸縮移動する。すると、リニアのポテンショメータ17aは、入力する基準電圧に対してセンサヘッド17bの移動量に応じた電圧値を出力する。この電圧値に基づいて、図示しない処理部例えばCPUが、センサヘッドの初期位置に対するセンサヘッド17bの移動量を、計算する。このようにして、軸変位検出部17aは、操作ロッド15の軸方向の変位を検出する。なお、操作ロッド15の軸方向の変位は、初期位置を基準として正の値又は負の値になる。 When the axial movement permission member 80 moves in the axial direction with respect to the mounting member 70 with reference to the initial position, the sensor head 17b expands and contracts in the axial direction following the movement in the axial direction. Then, the linear potentiometer 17a outputs a voltage value corresponding to the amount of movement of the sensor head 17b with respect to the input reference voltage. Based on this voltage value, a processor (not shown) such as a CPU calculates the amount of movement of the sensor head 17b relative to the initial position of the sensor head. In this way, the shaft displacement detector 17a detects the displacement of the operation rod 15 in the axial direction. The axial displacement of the operating rod 15 takes a positive value or a negative value with reference to the initial position.
 続いて、軸移動許可部材80の軸方向の変位に基づいて、操作ロッド15に加わった軸方向の操作力が算出される。例えば、図示しない処理部例えばCPUは、軸移動許可部材80の軸方向変位と、この軸方向変位に対応する軸力との対応テーブルに基づいて、操作ロッド15に加わった軸方向の操作力を検出する。なお、対応テーブルは、複数の弾性部材94の剛性、例えば2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bの面外方向の剛性に基づいて、設定されている。 Subsequently, the axial operation force applied to the operation rod 15 is calculated based on the axial displacement of the shaft movement permission member 80. For example, a processing unit (not shown), such as a CPU, generates an axial operation force applied to the operation rod 15 based on a correspondence table of the axial displacement of the axial movement permission member 80 and the axial force corresponding to the axial displacement. To detect. The correspondence table is set based on the rigidity of the plurality of elastic members 94, for example, the rigidity in the out-of-plane direction of the two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b.
 上記のような上肢訓練装置1では、患者Tが、アタッチメントATに自分の手又は腕を乗せて又はアタッチメントATを把持して、操作ロッド15を軸方向に操作すると、アタッチメントATが取り付けられたアタッチメント取付部59が、操作方向(上下)に移動する。詳細には、患者Tが操作ロッド15を軸方向に操作したときに、操作ロッド15に軸方向以外の力の成分が発生した場合、この力の成分は弾性部材94によって吸収される。そして、操作ロッド15に発生した軸方向力によって、軸移動許可部材80が、すべり軸受90を介して装着部材70に対して軸方向に移動する。このときには、軸移動許可部材80に固定された基準部材88も同時に軸方向に移動し、基準部材88に当接したセンサヘッドが、伸縮する。すると、伸縮操作力検出機構17において、センサヘッドの伸縮量に対応する軸力、すなわち操作ロッド15に加わった軸方向の操作力が、検出される。 In the above-mentioned upper limb training apparatus 1, when the patient T places his / her hand or arm on the attachment AT or holds the attachment AT and operates the operation rod 15 in the axial direction, the attachment to which the attachment AT is attached. The attachment portion 59 moves in the operation direction (up and down). Specifically, when a force component other than the axial direction is generated in the operating rod 15 when the patient T operates the operating rod 15 in the axial direction, the force component is absorbed by the elastic member 94. Then, the axial movement permission member 80 moves in the axial direction with respect to the mounting member 70 via the slide bearing 90 by the axial force generated in the operation rod 15. At this time, the reference member 88 fixed to the shaft movement permission member 80 also moves in the axial direction at the same time, and the sensor head in contact with the reference member 88 expands and contracts. Then, the expansion / contraction operation force detection mechanism 17 detects an axial force corresponding to the expansion / contraction amount of the sensor head, that is, an axial operation force applied to the operation rod 15.
 上記のように、この上肢訓練装置1では、2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bを設けることによって、操作ロッド15に作用する軸方向以外の力は、これら2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bによって、吸収される。この状態において、軸変位検出部17aは、操作ロッド15に作用した軸方向力に対応する軸方向の変位を、検出する。このように、この上肢訓練装置1では、操作ロッド15に作用する軸方向以外の力を、2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bによって吸収しながら、軸変位検出部17aが、軸方向の変位を検出することができるので、操作ロッド15の軸方向にのみ作用する力を正確に求めることができる。 As described above, in the upper limb training apparatus 1, by providing the two plate-like spiral springs 94 a and 94 b, forces other than the axial direction acting on the operation rod 15 can be applied to these two plate-like spiral springs. It is absorbed by 94a, 94b. In this state, the axial displacement detection unit 17a detects an axial displacement corresponding to the axial force applied to the operation rod 15. As described above, in the upper limb training apparatus 1, the axial displacement detection unit 17 a absorbs the axial force acting on the operation rod 15 by the two plate-like spiral springs 94 a and 94 b while the axial displacement detection unit 17 a is in the axial direction. Since the displacement can be detected, the force acting only in the axial direction of the operating rod 15 can be accurately obtained.
 また、軸変位検出部17aは操作ロッド15の内部に配置されているので、不用な外力例えば衝撃力等が、軸変位検出部17aに対して直接的に作用しない。これにより、軸変位検出部17aの測定対象の変位(軸方向の変位)だけを、より正確に測定できる。 Also, since the shaft displacement detector 17a is disposed inside the operation rod 15, unnecessary external force such as impact force does not directly act on the shaft displacement detector 17a. Thereby, only the displacement (axial displacement) of the measurement object of the axial displacement detector 17a can be measured more accurately.
 また、軸変位検出部17aは、例えばリニアのポテンショメータであるので、リニアのポテンショメータ17aのセンサヘッド17bを、軸移動許可部材80に当接させることによって、装着部材70に対する軸移動許可部材80の軸方向の位置を、より正確に検出できる。 Further, since the shaft displacement detector 17a is, for example, a linear potentiometer, the shaft of the shaft movement permission member 80 relative to the mounting member 70 is brought into contact with the shaft movement permission member 80 by bringing the sensor head 17b of the linear potentiometer 17a into contact with the shaft movement permission member 80. The position in the direction can be detected more accurately.
 また、この上肢訓練装置1では、2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bが、軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81と軸移動許可部材80の外装部82との間において、軸方向に所定の間隔を隔てて配置されているので、操作ロッド15に直接作用しうる軸方向以外の力や、モーメント発生時の軸方向以外の力等を、確実に吸収できる。 In the upper limb training apparatus 1, the two plate-like spiral springs 94 a and 94 b are arranged in the axial direction between the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80 and the exterior portion 82 of the shaft movement permission member 80. Since they are arranged at a predetermined interval, it is possible to reliably absorb forces other than the axial direction that can directly act on the operating rod 15, forces other than the axial direction when a moment is generated, and the like.
 また、この上肢訓練装置1では、操作ロッド15に作用する軸方向以外の力を吸収する弾性部材94が、渦巻きバネ94a,94bであるので、力を吸収する際の方向依存性を小さくできる。特に、ここでは、渦巻きバネ94a,94bとして、例えば板状の渦巻きバネを用いている。板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bは、金属薄板を切り抜いて形成することができるので、外周部位及び中心部位の加工が容易であり、かつ精度良く加工できる。これにより、渦巻きバネ94a,94bそのものの方向依存性をより小さくできる。 Moreover, in this upper limb training apparatus 1, since the elastic member 94 that absorbs the force other than the axial direction acting on the operating rod 15 is the spiral springs 94a and 94b, the direction dependency when absorbing the force can be reduced. In particular, here, for example, plate-like spiral springs are used as the spiral springs 94a and 94b. Since the plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b can be formed by cutting out a thin metal plate, the outer peripheral portion and the central portion can be easily processed and can be processed with high accuracy. As a result, the direction dependency of the spiral springs 94a and 94b itself can be further reduced.
 また、この上肢訓練装置1では、2枚の板状の渦巻きバネ94a,94bが表裏反転して軸方向に所定の間隔を隔てて配置されるので、軸方向の方向依存性も同時に小さくできる。 Further, in this upper limb training apparatus 1, since the two plate-like spiral springs 94a and 94b are reversed and arranged at a predetermined interval in the axial direction, the axial direction dependency can be reduced at the same time.
 さらに、この上肢訓練装置1では、装着部材70の軸部72と、軸移動許可部材80の筒状部81との間には、すべり軸受90が配置されているので、軸移動許可部材80は装着部材70に対してスムースに軸移動する。これにより、装着部材70に対する軸移動許可部材80の変位を、より正確に測定できる。また、すべり軸受90の材質が樹脂であるので、すべり軸受90の形状がブッシュ形状であっても、すべり軸受90を所定の大きさで容易に成型できる。 Furthermore, in this upper limb training apparatus 1, since the slide bearing 90 is disposed between the shaft portion 72 of the mounting member 70 and the cylindrical portion 81 of the shaft movement permission member 80, the shaft movement permission member 80 is The shaft moves smoothly with respect to the mounting member 70. Thereby, the displacement of the shaft movement permission member 80 with respect to the mounting member 70 can be measured more accurately. Moreover, since the material of the slide bearing 90 is resin, even if the shape of the slide bearing 90 is a bush shape, the slide bearing 90 can be easily molded with a predetermined size.
(2-8)外装カバー
 外装カバー18は、第1ジンバル機構30と第2ジンバル機構40等の内部機構を外部に露出しないように上から覆うカバー構造である。外装カバー18は、図1~図4に示すように、訓練装置本体3の下部の周囲を覆う本体カバー200の上部に装着され、本体カバー200とともに訓練装置本体3の内部を覆っている。このように外装カバー18が第1ジンバル機構30と第2ジンバル機構40を覆っているので、埃やゴミが第1ジンバル機構30と第2ジンバル機構40に付着するのが防止される。また、人が誤って第1ジンバル機構30と第2ジンバル機構40に触れてしまうことが防止される。
(2-8) Exterior Cover The exterior cover 18 is a cover structure that covers internal mechanisms such as the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40 from above so as not to be exposed to the outside. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the exterior cover 18 is attached to the upper part of the main body cover 200 that covers the periphery of the lower part of the training apparatus main body 3 and covers the inside of the training apparatus main body 3 together with the main body cover 200. Thus, since the exterior cover 18 covers the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40, dust and dust are prevented from adhering to the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40. Further, it is possible to prevent a person from touching the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40 by mistake.
 外装カバー18は、第1移動カバー201と、第2移動カバー202と、第1従動カバー203と、第2従動カバー204と、固定カバー205と、を有している。これらカバーは、合成樹脂製のドーム形状部材であり、上記の順番で上から下まで重なるように配置されている。ドーム形状とは、球面の一部となる形状であり、小径開口縁が上方に位置しており、大径開口縁が下方に位置しており、小径開口縁から大径開口縁に向かって滑らかに湾曲した形状である。各カバーは、それぞれのドーム形状に沿った方向に互いに相対移動可能になっている。上下に並んだカバーでは、上側のカバーの外径が下側のカバーの内径より大きくなっており、したがって、上側のカバーの大径開口縁部が下側のカバーの小径開口縁部の上方に重なっている。 The exterior cover 18 includes a first moving cover 201, a second moving cover 202, a first driven cover 203, a second driven cover 204, and a fixed cover 205. These covers are dome-shaped members made of synthetic resin, and are arranged so as to overlap from top to bottom in the above order. The dome shape is a shape that becomes a part of a spherical surface. The small-diameter opening edge is located above, the large-diameter opening edge is located below, and smooth from the small-diameter opening edge toward the large-diameter opening edge. This is a curved shape. Each cover is movable relative to each other in the direction along the respective dome shape. In the upper and lower covers, the outer diameter of the upper cover is larger than the inner diameter of the lower cover, so that the large-diameter opening edge of the upper cover is above the small-diameter opening edge of the lower cover. overlapping.
 第1移動カバー201は、主に、ドーム形状部分201aから構成されている。第1移動カバー201は、操作ロッド15に一体に移動するように、操作ロッド15に固定されている。具体的には、第1移動カバー201は、図21に示すように、小径開口縁201bが操作ロッド15の外周面に固定されている。なお、第1移動カバー201は半割れの2つの部材から構成されている。 The first moving cover 201 is mainly composed of a dome-shaped portion 201a. The first moving cover 201 is fixed to the operation rod 15 so as to move integrally with the operation rod 15. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the first moving cover 201 has a small-diameter opening edge 201 b fixed to the outer peripheral surface of the operation rod 15. In addition, the 1st moving cover 201 is comprised from two members of a half crack.
 第2移動カバー202は、主に、ドーム形状部分202aから構成されている。第2移動カバー202は、可動フレーム12に一体に移動するように固定され、第1移動カバー201と固定カバー205との間で両者に相対移動可能である。
 第2移動カバー202は、可動フレーム12の第2可動部分32に固定されている。より具体的には、図5~図9に示すように、第2可動部分32には上方に延びる連結フレーム207が設けられており、連結フレーム207の上端に第2移動カバー202が固定されている。具体的には、図21に示すように、第2移動カバー202の小径開口縁202bから下方に向かって円筒状部分202cが延びており、筒状部分202cが連結フレーム207に連結されている。患者Tが操作ロッド15を傾動させて、操作ロッド15が可動フレーム12に対して相対移動した場合に、第2移動カバー202は第1移動カバー201と相対移動可能であり、第2移動カバー202から第1移動カバー201に作用する抵抗が少なく又はほとんど無いようになっている。したがって、操作ロッド15を操作する操作力が小さい場合でもほぼ正確に操作力を検知できる。特に、図22に示すように、第1移動カバー201のドーム形状部分201aの下面と第2移動カバー202のドーム形状部分202a上面との間には、隙間S1が確保されることが好ましい。これによれば、第1移動カバー201と第2移動カバー202は接触していないので、第1移動カバー201と第2移動カバー202とが相対移動したときに、両者間で摩擦抵抗が生じない。したがって、傾動操作力検出機構14は、患者Tの傾動操作により操作ロッド15に加わる操作力及び操作力の方向を示す傾動操作ベクトルを、小さい操作力であっても正確に検出できる。
 なお、第2移動カバー202は、可動フレーム12に固定されているので、カバー構造の強度が向上している。
The second moving cover 202 is mainly composed of a dome-shaped portion 202a. The second moving cover 202 is fixed so as to move integrally with the movable frame 12, and is relatively movable between the first moving cover 201 and the fixed cover 205.
The second moving cover 202 is fixed to the second movable portion 32 of the movable frame 12. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 5 to 9, the second movable portion 32 is provided with a connecting frame 207 extending upward, and the second moving cover 202 is fixed to the upper end of the connecting frame 207. Yes. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, a cylindrical portion 202 c extends downward from the small-diameter opening edge 202 b of the second moving cover 202, and the cylindrical portion 202 c is connected to the connecting frame 207. When the patient T tilts the operation rod 15 and the operation rod 15 moves relative to the movable frame 12, the second moving cover 202 can move relative to the first moving cover 201. Therefore, there is little or almost no resistance acting on the first moving cover 201. Therefore, even when the operating force for operating the operating rod 15 is small, the operating force can be detected almost accurately. In particular, as shown in FIG. 22, it is preferable that a gap S <b> 1 is secured between the lower surface of the dome-shaped portion 201 a of the first moving cover 201 and the upper surface of the dome-shaped portion 202 a of the second moving cover 202. According to this, since the first moving cover 201 and the second moving cover 202 are not in contact, when the first moving cover 201 and the second moving cover 202 move relative to each other, no frictional resistance is generated between them. . Therefore, the tilting operation force detection mechanism 14 can accurately detect the operation force applied to the operation rod 15 by the tilting operation of the patient T and the tilting operation vector indicating the direction of the operation force even with a small operation force.
Since the second moving cover 202 is fixed to the movable frame 12, the strength of the cover structure is improved.
 第1従動カバー203及び第2従動カバー204は、それぞれ、ドーム形状部分203a及び204aを含む。第1従動カバー203及び第2従動カバー204は、第2移動カバー202と固定カバー205との間に配置されている。第1従動カバー203及び第2従動カバー204は、固定フレーム11、可動フレーム12及び操作ロッド15のいずれに対しても固定されていない。第2移動カバー202と第1従動カバー203は互いに接触しており、第1従動カバー203と第2従動カバー204は互いに接触している。したがって、第2移動カバー202が固定カバー205に対して移動すると、その動きに第1従動カバー203と第2従動カバー204は追従する。 The first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 include dome-shaped portions 203a and 204a, respectively. The first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 are disposed between the second moving cover 202 and the fixed cover 205. The first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 are not fixed to any of the fixed frame 11, the movable frame 12, and the operation rod 15. The second moving cover 202 and the first driven cover 203 are in contact with each other, and the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 are in contact with each other. Therefore, when the second moving cover 202 moves relative to the fixed cover 205, the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 follow the movement.
 第1従動カバー203は、その上端に小径開口縁203bが形成され、その下端に大径開口縁が形成され、小径開口縁203b及び大径開口縁を通って操作ロッド15が挿通される。小径開口縁203bから下方に延びて環状の下向き突起部203cが形成されている。第1従動カバー203は、さらに、大径開口部から下方に延びる環状の突起203dを有している。突起203dは、第2従動カバー204の上面に当接している。このような構造により、第1従動カバー203のドーム形状部分203aの下面と第2従動カバー204のドーム形状部分204aの上面との間には、隙間S2が確保されている。 The first driven cover 203 has a small-diameter opening edge 203b formed at the upper end thereof, a large-diameter opening edge formed at the lower end thereof, and the operation rod 15 is inserted through the small-diameter opening edge 203b and the large-diameter opening edge. An annular downward projection 203c is formed extending downward from the small-diameter opening edge 203b. The first driven cover 203 further has an annular protrusion 203d that extends downward from the large-diameter opening. The protrusion 203 d is in contact with the upper surface of the second driven cover 204. With such a structure, a gap S <b> 2 is secured between the lower surface of the dome-shaped portion 203 a of the first driven cover 203 and the upper surface of the dome-shaped portion 204 a of the second driven cover 204.
 第2従動カバー204は、その上端に小径開口縁204bが形成され、その下端に大径開口縁が形成され、小径開口縁204b及び大径開口縁204eを通って操作ロッド15が挿通される。第2従動カバー204は、小径開口縁204bから下方に延びる環状の下向き突起部204cと、小径開口縁204bから上方に延びる環状の上向き突起部204dとを有している。第2従動カバー204の下端の大径開口縁204eの上面には、下に向かって厚みが小さくなるテーパ面204fが形成されている。 The second driven cover 204 has a small-diameter opening edge 204b at its upper end, a large-diameter opening edge at its lower end, and the operation rod 15 is inserted through the small-diameter opening edge 204b and the large-diameter opening edge 204e. The second driven cover 204 has an annular downward projection 204c extending downward from the small diameter opening edge 204b and an annular upward projection 204d extending upward from the small diameter opening edge 204b. On the upper surface of the large-diameter opening edge 204e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204, a tapered surface 204f whose thickness decreases downward is formed.
 固定カバー205は、主に、ドーム形状部分205aからなり、その上端に開口縁205bを有している。さらに、固定カバー205は、ドーム形状部分205aの大径開口縁から半径方向外側に延びる外周フランジ205cを有している。 The fixed cover 205 mainly includes a dome-shaped portion 205a and has an opening edge 205b at the upper end thereof. Further, the fixed cover 205 has an outer peripheral flange 205c extending radially outward from the large-diameter opening edge of the dome-shaped portion 205a.
 第1従動カバー203は第2従動カバー204に対して傾きが大きくなると、図22に示すように、下向き突起部203cが第2従動カバー204の上向き突起部204dに係合することで移動が制限される。なお、傾き方向の反対側では、第1従動カバー203の突起203dが第2従動カバー204の上向き突起部204dに係合する(図4参照)。また、第2従動カバー204は固定カバー205に対して傾きが大きくなると、下向き突起部204cが固定カバー205の小径開口縁205bに係合することで移動が制限される。以上のように、第1従動カバー203と第2従動カバー204の固定カバー205に対する傾動が制限されているので、外部から見たときにカバー同士に隙間が生じないようにできる。(図4参照)。こうして、外装カバー18は、操作ロッド15の傾動度合いにかかわらず、第1ジンバル機構30と第2ジンバル機構40等の内部機構を外部に露出しないように上から覆う。
 第1従動カバー203及び第2従動カバー204は、前述のように、第2移動カバー202の動きに従動する。ここで、第1従動カバー203と第2従動カバー204が摩擦又は互いに衝突したとしても、そのような現象は傾動操作力検出機構14に影響を与えない。なぜなら、第2移動カバー202は可動フレーム12に固定されているからである。
When the inclination of the first driven cover 203 with respect to the second driven cover 204 is increased, the movement is restricted by the downward projection 203c engaging the upward projection 204d of the second driven cover 204 as shown in FIG. Is done. On the opposite side of the tilt direction, the protrusion 203d of the first driven cover 203 is engaged with the upward protrusion 204d of the second driven cover 204 (see FIG. 4). Further, when the inclination of the second driven cover 204 with respect to the fixed cover 205 is increased, the movement of the second driven cover 204 is restricted due to the downward protruding portion 204 c engaging with the small-diameter opening edge 205 b of the fixed cover 205. As described above, since the tilting of the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 with respect to the fixed cover 205 is restricted, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the covers when viewed from the outside. (See FIG. 4). Thus, the exterior cover 18 covers the internal mechanisms such as the first gimbal mechanism 30 and the second gimbal mechanism 40 from above so as not to be exposed to the outside regardless of the tilting degree of the operation rod 15.
The first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 follow the movement of the second moving cover 202 as described above. Here, even if the first driven cover 203 and the second driven cover 204 are rubbed or collide with each other, such a phenomenon does not affect the tilting operation force detection mechanism 14. This is because the second moving cover 202 is fixed to the movable frame 12.
 次に各カバーのドーム形状に沿った半径方向長さ(小径開口縁から大径開口縁までの長さ)について説明する。第2移動カバー202のドーム形状部分202aの円周方向長さは、第1従動カバー203のドーム形状部分203aの円周方向長さと概ね等しい。さらに、第2従動カバー204のドーム形状部分204aの円周方向長さは、第2移動カバー202のドーム形状部分202a及び第1従動カバー203のドーム形状部分203aの円周方向長さより長く、固定カバー205のドーム形状部分205aの円周方向長さより短い。 Next, the length in the radial direction along the dome shape of each cover (the length from the small-diameter opening edge to the large-diameter opening edge) will be described. The circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 202a of the second moving cover 202 is substantially equal to the circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 203a of the first driven cover 203. Furthermore, the circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 204a of the second driven cover 204 is longer than the circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 202a of the second moving cover 202 and the dome-shaped portion 203a of the first driven cover 203, and is fixed. It is shorter than the circumferential length of the dome-shaped portion 205a of the cover 205.
 以上の各カバーの長さ関係に基づいて、図22に示すように、各カバーが一方向に移動することで互いに係合した状態を説明する。図22では、第2従動カバー204が固定カバー205に係止され、第1従動カバー203が第2従動カバー204に係止され、さらに第2移動カバー202が第1従動カバー203に係止されている。この状態では、第2従動カバー204の下端の大径開口縁204eが第2移動カバー202及び第1従動カバー203の下端の大径開口縁よりさらに下方に延びている。また、第2従動カバー204の下端の大径開口縁204eと固定カバー205の外周フランジ205cとの間には、隙間S3が確保されている。つまり、第2従動カバー204の大径開口縁204eは一番下まで落ちることがなく、そのため人が第2従動カバー204と固定カバー205の外周フランジ205cとの間で指を挟むことが生じにくい。 Based on the length relationship of each cover described above, a state where the covers are engaged with each other by moving in one direction will be described as shown in FIG. In FIG. 22, the second driven cover 204 is locked to the fixed cover 205, the first driven cover 203 is locked to the second driven cover 204, and the second moving cover 202 is locked to the first driven cover 203. ing. In this state, the large-diameter opening edge 204e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204 extends further downward than the large-diameter opening edges at the lower ends of the second moving cover 202 and the first driven cover 203. Further, a clearance S <b> 3 is secured between the large-diameter opening edge 204 e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204 and the outer peripheral flange 205 c of the fixed cover 205. That is, the large-diameter opening edge 204e of the second driven cover 204 does not fall to the bottom, so that it is difficult for a person to pinch a finger between the second driven cover 204 and the outer peripheral flange 205c of the fixed cover 205. .
 この場合、第2従動カバー204の下端の大径開口縁204eには、下に向かって厚みが小さくなるテーパ面204fが形成されているので、第2従動カバー204が傾いて下端の大径開口縁204eの一部が最下方に移動した場合でも、人の指が第2従動カバー204の下端の大径開口縁204eと固定カバー205の平坦な外周フランジ205cとの間の隙間S3に挟まれにくい。
 なお、操作ロッド15が可動フレーム12に対して傾動可能な量は、可動フレーム12が固定フレーム11に対して傾動可能な量より小さく設定されている。したがって、従属カバーは、第1移動カバー201と第2移動カバー202との間ではなく、第2移動カバー202と固定カバー205との間に配置されている。それに対して、もしも従属カバーが第1移動カバー201と第2移動カバー202との間に配置されると、操作ロッドが操作されるときに操作ロッドは従属カバーを動かす必要が出てくるので、患者の操作力に対して若干の抵抗力が発生してしまい、それは好ましくない。
In this case, the large-diameter opening edge 204e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204 is formed with a tapered surface 204f whose thickness decreases downward, so that the second driven cover 204 is inclined and the large-diameter opening at the lower end is inclined. Even when a part of the edge 204e moves to the lowermost position, a human finger is caught in the gap S3 between the large-diameter opening edge 204e at the lower end of the second driven cover 204 and the flat outer peripheral flange 205c of the fixed cover 205. Hateful.
The amount by which the operating rod 15 can tilt with respect to the movable frame 12 is set smaller than the amount by which the movable frame 12 can tilt with respect to the fixed frame 11. Therefore, the subordinate cover is disposed not between the first moving cover 201 and the second moving cover 202 but between the second moving cover 202 and the fixed cover 205. On the other hand, if the subordinate cover is disposed between the first moving cover 201 and the second moving cover 202, the operating rod needs to move the subordinate cover when the operating rod is operated. Some resistance to the patient's operating force is generated, which is not preferable.
(3)椅子
 図27及び図28を参照して、椅子4は、椅子本体511と、脚部512とを有している。椅子本体511は、座席511aと、背もたれ511bと、肩レスト511cとを有している。脚部512は、椅子本体511から下方に延びる柱部材512aと、柱部材512aの下端から放射状に延びる複数の脚512bと、脚512bの先端に取り付けられたキャスタ512cとを有している。柱部材512aは、例えば六角柱であり、上下両端において他の部材と回転不能に連結されている。キャスタ512cには、それぞれ回り止め機構(図示せず)が設けられている。
(3) Chair With reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, the chair 4 includes a chair body 511 and leg portions 512. The chair body 511 has a seat 511a, a backrest 511b, and a shoulder rest 511c. The leg portion 512 includes a column member 512a extending downward from the chair body 511, a plurality of legs 512b extending radially from the lower end of the column member 512a, and a caster 512c attached to the tip of the leg 512b. The column member 512a is, for example, a hexagonal column, and is non-rotatably connected to other members at both upper and lower ends. Each of the casters 512c is provided with a detent mechanism (not shown).
 椅子4には、さらに、椅子本体511に患者Tを拘束するための拘束具515が設けられている。拘束具515は、シートベルトのようなベルト部材である。患者Tは、椅子本体511に座った状態でしかも拘束具515によって椅子本体511に拘束された状態で、操作ロッド15を操作する。患者Tが椅子本体511に拘束されることによって、患者Tの位置及び向きが変動しないので、上肢を正確に訓練できる。 The chair 4 is further provided with a restraining tool 515 for restraining the patient T on the chair body 511. The restraining tool 515 is a belt member such as a seat belt. The patient T operates the operation rod 15 while sitting on the chair body 511 and being restrained by the restraint 515 to the chair body 511. Since the patient T is restrained by the chair main body 511, the position and orientation of the patient T do not change, so that the upper limb can be accurately trained.
(4)連結機構
(4-1)連結機構の基本的機能
 連結機構5は、椅子4と訓練装置本体3とを一体に連結する。連結機構5は、椅子4が連結機構5によって訓練装置本体3に連結された状態を維持しながら、椅子4を右腕訓練位置と左腕訓練位置との間で移動可能とし、右腕訓練位置321と左腕訓練位置322とで位置調整及び固定される(図27参照)。ここで、「固定される」とは、椅子4が訓練装置本体3に対して位置を変更できなくなり、向きも変更できなくなった状態をいう。したがって、椅子4を上肢の訓練条件に応じた適切な位置に容易に固定できる。また、椅子4は連結機構5によって訓練装置本体3に固定された状態を維持されるので、患者Tが訓練装置本体3の操作ロッド15を操作中に椅子4が動き出すような不具合が生じない。したがって、患者Tの上肢を正確に訓練できる。
(4) Connection mechanism (4-1) Basic function of connection mechanism The connection mechanism 5 connects the chair 4 and the training apparatus main body 3 integrally. The connection mechanism 5 enables the chair 4 to be moved between the right arm training position and the left arm training position while maintaining the state where the chair 4 is connected to the training apparatus main body 3 by the connection mechanism 5, and the right arm training position 321 and the left arm The position is adjusted and fixed at the training position 322 (see FIG. 27). Here, “fixed” refers to a state in which the chair 4 cannot change the position with respect to the training apparatus main body 3 and the direction cannot be changed. Therefore, the chair 4 can be easily fixed at an appropriate position according to the training condition of the upper limb. In addition, since the chair 4 is maintained in the state of being fixed to the training apparatus main body 3 by the connection mechanism 5, there is no problem that the chair 4 starts moving while the patient T operates the operation rod 15 of the training apparatus main body 3. Therefore, the upper limb of the patient T can be accurately trained.
(4-2)連結機構の具体的構造
 図36及び図37に示すように、連結機構5は、第1アーム501と、第2アーム502とを有している。第1アーム501の第1端部501aと、第2アーム502の第1端部502aとは、第1連結部503によって回動可能に連結されている。
 第1アーム501の第2端部501bと訓練装置本体3とは、第2連結部504によって回動可能に連結されている。第2連結部504は、訓練装置本体3の前後X方向後ろ側(手前側)に設けられた固定部506に固定されている。
 第2アーム502の第2端部502bと椅子4とは、第3連結部505によって回動可能に連結されている。第3連結部505には、リング状の固定部材507が固定されている。固定部材507は、椅子4の柱部材512aに回動不能に固定されている。
(4-2) Specific Structure of Connecting Mechanism As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the connecting mechanism 5 has a first arm 501 and a second arm 502. The first end portion 501a of the first arm 501 and the first end portion 502a of the second arm 502 are rotatably connected by a first connecting portion 503.
The second end portion 501b of the first arm 501 and the training apparatus main body 3 are rotatably connected by a second connecting portion 504. The second connecting portion 504 is fixed to a fixing portion 506 provided on the rear side (front side) in the front-rear X direction of the training apparatus main body 3.
The second end 502b of the second arm 502 and the chair 4 are rotatably connected by a third connecting portion 505. A ring-shaped fixing member 507 is fixed to the third connecting portion 505. The fixing member 507 is fixed to the column member 512a of the chair 4 so as not to rotate.
 この装置では、第1アーム501の第1端部501aと第2アーム502の第1端部502a、第1アーム501の第2端部501bと訓練装置本体3、第2アーム502の第2端部502bと椅子4とが、それぞれ第1~第3連結部503~505によって回動及び固定可能に連結されている。したがって、上記の3箇所を回動して角度位置を調整することで椅子4の訓練装置本体3に対する位置及び向きが決定される。つまり、上記の3箇所の回動量又は相対的な角度位置と椅子4の訓練装置本体3に対する位置及び向きとの関係を予め把握しておけば、医師又は作業療法士は3箇所の回動量又は相対的な角度位置を指示することで、椅子4の具体的な位置及び向きを指示できる。そして、操作者は、指示に従うことで、椅子4を正確に位置決めできる。 In this apparatus, the first end 501 a of the first arm 501 and the first end 502 a of the second arm 502, the second end 501 b of the first arm 501, the training apparatus main body 3, and the second end of the second arm 502 The portion 502b and the chair 4 are connected to each other by first to third connecting portions 503 to 505 so as to be rotatable and fixed. Therefore, the position and direction of the chair 4 with respect to the training apparatus main body 3 are determined by rotating the three places and adjusting the angular position. That is, if the relationship between the rotation amount or the relative angular position of the three locations and the position and orientation of the chair 4 with respect to the training apparatus main body 3 is grasped in advance, the doctor or occupational therapist By indicating the relative angular position, the specific position and orientation of the chair 4 can be instructed. Then, the operator can accurately position the chair 4 by following the instructions.
 連結機構5は、椅子4が訓練装置本体3の後ろ(手前)を通って右腕訓練位置と左腕訓練位置との間で移動するように、椅子4と訓練装置本体3を連結している。この場合、椅子4を動かすときの作業が容易であり、しかも椅子4を移動するためのスペースが小さくなる。
 なお、第1アーム501,第2アーム502及び第1連結部503は、椅子4の脚512bより高い位置に配置されているので、両者が互いに干渉することはない。
The connection mechanism 5 connects the chair 4 and the training apparatus main body 3 so that the chair 4 moves between the right arm training position and the left arm training position through the back (near side) of the training apparatus main body 3. In this case, the work for moving the chair 4 is easy, and the space for moving the chair 4 is reduced.
In addition, since the 1st arm 501, the 2nd arm 502, and the 1st connection part 503 are arrange | positioned in the position higher than the leg 512b of the chair 4, both do not interfere with each other.
 図36~図39を用いて、連結機構5の構造及び機能についてさらに詳細に説明する。
 図36は、椅子4を右腕訓練位置321に配置する場合の椅子4と訓練装置本体3との位置関係を示している。この図では、訓練装置本体3の操作ロッド15の位置を基準として、椅子4が右腕訓練位置321において固定されるべき座標を図示している。図における複数の黒点は、椅子4の柱部材512aの中心が配置される可能性がある座標である。
The structure and function of the coupling mechanism 5 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 36 shows the positional relationship between the chair 4 and the training apparatus main body 3 when the chair 4 is placed at the right arm training position 321. In this figure, the coordinates at which the chair 4 should be fixed at the right arm training position 321 are illustrated with reference to the position of the operation rod 15 of the training apparatus body 3. A plurality of black dots in the figure are coordinates at which the center of the column member 512a of the chair 4 may be arranged.
 第1連結部503、第2連結部504及び第3連結部505は、2種類の部材を回動可能に連結する部材であり、基本的な構造は共通である。以下、図38及び図39を用いて、第1連結部503の構造を説明する。
 第1連結部503は、主に、上側の第1部材521と、下側の第2部材522と、ロック機構523とを有している。
The 1st connection part 503, the 2nd connection part 504, and the 3rd connection part 505 are members which connect two types of members so that rotation is possible, and a basic structure is common. Hereinafter, the structure of the first connecting portion 503 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.
The first connecting portion 503 mainly includes an upper first member 521, a lower second member 522, and a lock mechanism 523.
 第1部材521には、第2アーム502の第1端部502aが固定されている。第1部材521は、カップ形状の部材であり、凸側面を上側に向けて配置されている。第1部材521は、湾曲部521aと、中心において上下方向に延びる筒状の第1シャフト521bとを有している。第1シャフト521bには、軸方向に延びる中心孔521cが形成されている。第2アーム502の第1端部502aは、湾曲部521aを貫通して、第1シャフト521bに固定されている。 The first end portion 502a of the second arm 502 is fixed to the first member 521. The first member 521 is a cup-shaped member, and is arranged with the convex side face upward. The first member 521 has a curved portion 521a and a cylindrical first shaft 521b extending in the vertical direction at the center. A central hole 521c extending in the axial direction is formed in the first shaft 521b. The first end 502a of the second arm 502 passes through the bending portion 521a and is fixed to the first shaft 521b.
 第2部材522には、第1アーム501の第1端部501aが固定されている。第2部材522は、カップ形状の部材であり、凸側面を下側に向けて配置されている。第2部材522は、湾曲部522aと、中心において上下方向に延びる筒状の第2シャフト522bとを有している。第2部材522の第2シャフト522bには、軸方向に延びる中心孔522cが形成されている。第1アーム501の第1端部501aは、湾曲部522aを貫通して、第2シャフト522bに固定されている。第2部材522は、さらに、上側端に半径方向外側に延びる円環状のフランジ522dを有している。 The first end 501a of the first arm 501 is fixed to the second member 522. The second member 522 is a cup-shaped member, and is arranged with the convex side face downward. The second member 522 has a curved portion 522a and a cylindrical second shaft 522b extending in the vertical direction at the center. A center hole 522c extending in the axial direction is formed in the second shaft 522b of the second member 522. The first end 501a of the first arm 501 passes through the bending portion 522a and is fixed to the second shaft 522b. The second member 522 further has an annular flange 522d extending radially outward at the upper end.
 第1部材521は、第2部材522の上に載置された状態で配置され、第2部材522に対して回動可能になっている。図38に示すように、第1部材521の湾曲部521aには下に向かって細い三角形状のマーク531が設けられ、第2部材522のフランジ522dの上面には所定の角度刻みで目盛り532が設けられている。つまり、マーク531が目盛り532のどの数字を指すかによって、第1部材521と第2部材522の変位角度、つまり第1アーム501と第2アーム502の成す角度が分かるようになっている。 The first member 521 is arranged in a state of being placed on the second member 522 and is rotatable with respect to the second member 522. As shown in FIG. 38, a thin triangular mark 531 is provided on the curved portion 521a of the first member 521, and a scale 532 is formed on the upper surface of the flange 522d of the second member 522 at a predetermined angular interval. Is provided. That is, the displacement angle of the first member 521 and the second member 522, that is, the angle formed by the first arm 501 and the second arm 502 can be determined depending on which number on the scale 532 the mark 531 indicates.
 ロック機構523は、第1部材521と第2部材522を回動不能に連結及び連結解除するための機構である。ロック機構523は、第1部材521と第2部材522とが画定する空間内に配置されている。ロック機構523は、回転シャフト524と、第1ロック部材525と、第2ロック部材526と、回り止め部材527と、ノブ528とを有している。 The lock mechanism 523 is a mechanism for connecting and releasing the first member 521 and the second member 522 so that they cannot rotate. The lock mechanism 523 is disposed in a space defined by the first member 521 and the second member 522. The lock mechanism 523 includes a rotation shaft 524, a first lock member 525, a second lock member 526, an anti-rotation member 527, and a knob 528.
 回転シャフト524は、第1シャフト521bの中心孔521c及び第2シャフト522bの中心孔522c内を延びている。回転シャフト524は、第1部材521及び第2部材522に対して回転可能に支持されており、さらに軸方向に脱落不能に支持されている。回転シャフト524の第1部材521側の端部には、ノブ528のねじ部が挿通されている。 The rotating shaft 524 extends through the center hole 521c of the first shaft 521b and the center hole 522c of the second shaft 522b. The rotating shaft 524 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the first member 521 and the second member 522, and is supported so as not to be detached in the axial direction. The threaded portion of the knob 528 is inserted through the end of the rotating shaft 524 on the first member 521 side.
 第1ロック部材525は、第2部材522の上端部に固定された環状又はリング状の板状部材である。第1ロック部材525は、内周縁に複数の第1歯525aを有している。
 第2ロック部材526は、第1ロック部材525の下方に配置された環状の板状部材である。第2ロック部材526は、外周縁に複数の第2歯526aを有している。第2歯526aは、斜め上側に延びており、第1ロック部材525の第1歯525aに係合可能となっている。第2ロック部材526の内周縁は、ネジ係合部529を介して回転シャフト524の外周面に係合している。
The first lock member 525 is an annular or ring-shaped plate member fixed to the upper end portion of the second member 522. The first lock member 525 has a plurality of first teeth 525a on the inner periphery.
The second lock member 526 is an annular plate-like member disposed below the first lock member 525. The second lock member 526 has a plurality of second teeth 526a on the outer peripheral edge. The second teeth 526a extend obliquely upward and can be engaged with the first teeth 525a of the first lock member 525. The inner peripheral edge of the second lock member 526 is engaged with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating shaft 524 via the screw engaging portion 529.
 回り止め部材527は、第2ロック部材526を第1部材521に軸方向に移動可能にかつ回転不能に連結するための部材である。回り止め部材527は、第2ロック部材526の上面に配置された環状の板状部材である。回り止め部材527の外径は、第1ロック部材525の内径より小さくなっており、したがって回り止め部材527と第1ロック部材525は互いに干渉しない。回り止め部材527は、第2ロック部材526に固定されている。回り止め部材527の内周縁は、回り止め部530を介して回転シャフト524の外周面に係合している。 The anti-rotation member 527 is a member for connecting the second lock member 526 to the first member 521 so as to be movable in the axial direction and non-rotatable. The detent member 527 is an annular plate-like member disposed on the upper surface of the second lock member 526. The outer diameter of the rotation prevention member 527 is smaller than the inner diameter of the first lock member 525, and therefore the rotation prevention member 527 and the first lock member 525 do not interfere with each other. The detent member 527 is fixed to the second lock member 526. The inner peripheral edge of the rotation prevention member 527 is engaged with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation shaft 524 via the rotation prevention portion 530.
 以上の構造により、ノブ528を操作して回転シャフト524を回転させると、第2ロック部材526及び回り止め部材527が上下方向に移動する。したがって、第2ロック部材526は第1ロック部材525に係合したロック位置と、第1ロック部材525から係合解除したロック解除位置との間で移動可能である。図39では、第2ロック部材526が第1ロック部材525から下方に離れたロック解除位置にある。この位置から第2ロック部材526が上方に移動すると、第2ロック部材526の第2歯526aが第1ロック部材525の第1歯525aに係合して、ロック状態になる。
 なお、第1歯525aと第2歯526aは一定のピッチで形成されている。つまり、第1連結部503によって、第1部材521と第2部材522はその一定のピッチ単位で回動させた位置で固定可能になっている。
With the above structure, when the rotary shaft 524 is rotated by operating the knob 528, the second lock member 526 and the rotation preventing member 527 move in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the second lock member 526 is movable between the lock position engaged with the first lock member 525 and the lock release position released from the first lock member 525. In FIG. 39, the second lock member 526 is in the unlocked position separated downward from the first lock member 525. When the second lock member 526 moves upward from this position, the second teeth 526a of the second lock member 526 engage with the first teeth 525a of the first lock member 525, and a locked state is established.
The first teeth 525a and the second teeth 526a are formed at a constant pitch. That is, the first connecting portion 503 allows the first member 521 and the second member 522 to be fixed at a position rotated by a certain pitch unit.
 なお、第2連結部504では、第1部材が第1アーム501に固定され、第2部材が訓練装置本体3の固定部506に固定されている。第3連結部505では、第1部材が第2アーム502に固定され、第2部材が固定部材507に固定されている。 In the second connecting portion 504, the first member is fixed to the first arm 501 and the second member is fixed to the fixing portion 506 of the training apparatus main body 3. In the third connecting portion 505, the first member is fixed to the second arm 502 and the second member is fixed to the fixing member 507.
(4-3)効果
 以上に述べたように、連結機構5が第1連結部503、第2連結部504及び第3連結部505を有しているので、椅子4を所定の訓練位置の範囲内で自由に位置決めできる。また、マーク531を目的とする目盛り532に合わせることで、一度設定した固定位置を簡単に再現できる。例えば、医師が各連結部においてマーク531が指すべき数値のセットを予め患者Tに伝えておけば、患者Tはその数字が再現されるように各連結部を調整すればよい。また、上記の説明は、椅子4を訓練装置本体3に連結した状態における位置調整に関するものであるが、椅子4を訓練装置本体3から連結解除してその後に両部材を別の場所に運んで組み立てる場合にも当てはまる。
(4-3) Effect As described above, since the connecting mechanism 5 includes the first connecting portion 503, the second connecting portion 504, and the third connecting portion 505, the chair 4 can be moved within a predetermined training position range. Can be positioned freely within. Further, by setting the mark 531 to the target scale 532, the fixed position once set can be easily reproduced. For example, if the doctor tells the patient T in advance a set of numerical values that the mark 531 should point to at each connecting portion, the patient T may adjust each connecting portion so that the numbers are reproduced. Moreover, although said description is related to the position adjustment in the state which connected the chair 4 to the training apparatus main body 3, the chair 4 is disconnected from the training apparatus main body 3, and both members are carried to another place after that. This is also true when assembling.
 さらに、全ての連結部503~505をゆるめた状態にすれば、椅子4を連結機構5によって訓練装置本体3に連結状態を維持しながら、椅子4を右腕訓練位置321と左腕訓練位置322との間で移動可能である。その際に、椅子4は訓練装置本体3の前後X方向後ろ(手前)を通って左右Y方向に移動できる。
 さらに、全ての連結部503~505を締めた状態にすれば、椅子4は訓練装置本体3に対して十分な強度で接続される。その結果、椅子4は訓練中に訓練装置本体3に対して移動しない。また、連結機構5によって、椅子4又は訓練装置本体3が転倒しにくくなっている。
Further, if all the connecting portions 503 to 505 are loosened, the chair 4 is connected to the training apparatus main body 3 by the connecting mechanism 5 while the chair 4 is placed between the right arm training position 321 and the left arm training position 322. It can be moved between. At that time, the chair 4 can move in the left-right Y direction through the back (front) of the training apparatus body 3 in the front-rear X direction.
Furthermore, if all the connecting portions 503 to 505 are tightened, the chair 4 is connected to the training apparatus body 3 with sufficient strength. As a result, the chair 4 does not move relative to the training apparatus body 3 during training. Further, the coupling mechanism 5 makes it difficult for the chair 4 or the training apparatus body 3 to fall.
(4-4)リモコン
 上肢訓練装置1は、図28に示すように、リモコン541と、リモコン用取り付け座542と、を備えている。リモコン541は、患者Tが例えば健常な腕で訓練装置本体3を操作するための装置である。リモコン541と訓練装置本体3とは、有線又は無線で接続されている。リモコン用取り付け座542は、椅子4の左右両側に取り付け可能である。リモコン用取り付け座542は椅子4の左右両側に取り付けられても良いが、実際にはリモコン用取り付け座542を患者Tに対して訓練側の腕と反対側に取り付ければよい。その結果、患者Tは、訓練していない健常な腕によってリモコン541を操作できる。
 なお、リモコン用取り付け座542の上面とリモコン541の下面には、面ファスナー(図示せず)が貼られ、この面ファスナーによって両者が固定されている。したがって、リモコン541は、リモコン用取り付け座542から脱落しにくい。
(4-4) Remote Control The upper limb training apparatus 1 includes a remote control 541 and a remote control mounting seat 542 as shown in FIG. The remote controller 541 is a device for the patient T to operate the training apparatus main body 3 with a healthy arm, for example. The remote controller 541 and the training apparatus main body 3 are connected by wire or wirelessly. The remote control mounting seat 542 can be mounted on the left and right sides of the chair 4. The remote control mounting seats 542 may be mounted on both the left and right sides of the chair 4, but in reality, the remote control mounting seats 542 may be mounted on the opposite side of the patient T from the training arm. As a result, the patient T can operate the remote controller 541 with a healthy arm that has not been trained.
A hook-and-loop fastener (not shown) is attached to the upper surface of the remote control mounting seat 542 and the lower surface of the remote controller 541, and both are fixed by the hook-and-loop fastener. Therefore, the remote controller 541 is unlikely to drop off from the remote control mounting seat 542.
 リモコン541は、図40及び図41に示すように、筐体543と、非常停止ボタン544と、筐体543の凹部543a、543b及び543cにそれぞれ配置された操作ボタン545、546及び547とを有している。非常停止ボタン544は、筐体543に設けられ、訓練装置本体3に対して非常停止を指示するための部材である。例えば訓練装置本体3に異常が発生した場合に、患者Tは、訓練中に椅子4に座ったままでリモコン541を操作して訓練装置本体3を非常停止できる。そのため、上肢訓練装置1の安全性が向上している。操作ボタン545~547には、訓練用ソフトウェアによって、決定、キャンセルなどの動作が割り当てられている。 As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the remote controller 541 includes a housing 543, an emergency stop button 544, and operation buttons 545, 546, and 547 disposed in the recesses 543a, 543b, and 543c of the housing 543, respectively. is doing. The emergency stop button 544 is provided on the housing 543 and is a member for instructing the training apparatus body 3 to perform an emergency stop. For example, when an abnormality occurs in the training apparatus main body 3, the patient T can perform an emergency stop of the training apparatus main body 3 by operating the remote controller 541 while sitting on the chair 4 during the training. Therefore, the safety of the upper limb training apparatus 1 is improved. Operations such as determination and cancellation are assigned to the operation buttons 545 to 547 by the training software.
 操作ボタン545、546及び547の押圧面は、押されていない状態において、筐体543の上面543dよりも内側にある。そのため、図41に示すように、リモコン541を側方から見た場合には、操作ボタン545、546及び547は見えない。したがって、患者Tが誤ってリモコン541を床面FLに落としたとしても、操作ボタン545、546又は547が誤って押されることが生じにくい。つまり、訓練装置本体3の誤動作が生じにくい。そのため、上肢訓練装置1の安全性が向上している。 The pressing surfaces of the operation buttons 545, 546, and 547 are inside the upper surface 543d of the housing 543 when not pressed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41, the operation buttons 545, 546, and 547 are not visible when the remote controller 541 is viewed from the side. Therefore, even if the patient T accidentally drops the remote controller 541 on the floor surface FL, the operation buttons 545, 546, or 547 are unlikely to be accidentally pressed. That is, malfunction of the training apparatus body 3 is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the safety of the upper limb training apparatus 1 is improved.
 筐体543の凹部543a~543cは、筐体543の上面543dから中心に向けて傾斜する環状のテーパ面543eを有している。患者Tが操作ボタン545~547を操作するときには、指をテーパ面543eに沿って滑らせるようにして操作ボタン545~547を押すことができる。したがって、患者Tが操作ボタン545~547を操作するときの操作性が良い。
 なお、操作ボタン545~547と非常停止ボタン544との間には、カーソルキー548が設けられている。図41に示すようにカーソルキー548の操作面は筐体543の上面543dから突出しているが、カーソルキー548は単に操作の設定を行う際にのみ使用されるのであって訓練装置本体3の重大な動作を実行させることはないので、特に安全性の問題は生じない。
The recesses 543a to 543c of the housing 543 have an annular tapered surface 543e inclined from the upper surface 543d of the housing 543 toward the center. When the patient T operates the operation buttons 545 to 547, the operation buttons 545 to 547 can be pushed by sliding the finger along the tapered surface 543e. Therefore, the operability when the patient T operates the operation buttons 545 to 547 is good.
A cursor key 548 is provided between the operation buttons 545 to 547 and the emergency stop button 544. As shown in FIG. 41, the operation surface of the cursor key 548 protrudes from the upper surface 543d of the housing 543. However, the cursor key 548 is used only for setting the operation, and is important for the training apparatus body 3. Therefore, there is no particular safety problem.
(5)モニタスタンド及びモニタアーム
 椅子4が訓練装置本体3に対して右腕訓練位置321又は左腕訓練位置322に配置されるのに対応して(図27参照)、モニタ7を患者Tが見やすい位置に移動させる構成を説明する。この構成は、主に、モニタスタンド6に装着されてモニタ7を支持するモニタアーム301からなる。なお、モニタ7は液晶ディスプレイといった薄型ディスプレイである。
 なお、モニタスタンド6、モニタ7及びモニタアーム301は、訓練装置本体3に対して一体的不可分に設けられている(つまり、別体の装置ではない)ので、運搬等の取り扱いが容易であり、さらに各装置同士の位置決めが容易かつ正確に行われる。
(5) Monitor stand and monitor arm Corresponding to the chair 4 being placed at the right arm training position 321 or the left arm training position 322 with respect to the training apparatus main body 3 (see FIG. 27), the position where the patient T can easily see the monitor 7 A configuration to be moved to will be described. This configuration mainly includes a monitor arm 301 that is attached to the monitor stand 6 and supports the monitor 7. The monitor 7 is a thin display such as a liquid crystal display.
Since the monitor stand 6, the monitor 7 and the monitor arm 301 are provided in an integral and inseparable manner with respect to the training apparatus body 3 (that is, not a separate apparatus), handling such as transportation is easy, Furthermore, positioning between the devices is easily and accurately performed.
 図28に示すように、モニタスタンド6は、ベースフレーム21から上方に延びる棒状の部材である。モニタスタンド6は、例えば、アルミフレームからなる。モニタスタンド6は、クランク折り曲げされており、操作ロッド15よりも前後X方向前側においてベースフレーム21に固定された基端部6aと、基端部6aから前後X方向前側に湾曲した湾曲部6bと、基端部6aより前後X方向前側に位置してモニタ7が設けられた上端部6cとを有している。上端部6cは、上下Z方向に直線状に延びている。このようにモニタスタンド6は基端部6aから上方に延びており、上端部6cが操作ロッド15から前後X方向前側に離れて配置されているので、訓練装置本体3の設置面積は十分に小さくしつつも、モニタ7を十分に前後X方向前側に配置する。その結果、操作ロッド15を前方に倒すときの傾き角度の許容値を十分に大きくできる。なぜなら、操作ロッド15を前後X方向前側に倒しても、操作ロッド15又はアタッチメントATがモニタ7に衝突しにくいからである。この例では、図27~図30に示すように、操作ロッド15が傾いてアタッチメントATが移動する最大可動範囲320は、前後X方向の前側限界320aが平面視では左右Y方向に延びる直線状となるD字形状である。そして、前側限界320aは訓練装置本体3の前後X方向前端にほぼ一致しているが、モニタ7は前側限界320aよりさらに前後X方向前側に位置している。 As shown in FIG. 28, the monitor stand 6 is a rod-shaped member extending upward from the base frame 21. The monitor stand 6 is made of an aluminum frame, for example. The monitor stand 6 is bent by a crank, and has a base end portion 6a fixed to the base frame 21 on the front side in the front-rear X direction with respect to the operation rod 15, and a curved portion 6b curved from the base end portion 6a to the front side in the front-rear X direction. And an upper end portion 6c provided with a monitor 7 located on the front side in the front-rear X direction from the base end portion 6a. The upper end 6c extends linearly in the vertical Z direction. As described above, the monitor stand 6 extends upward from the base end portion 6a, and the upper end portion 6c is disposed away from the operation rod 15 in the front-rear X direction front side, so that the installation area of the training apparatus body 3 is sufficiently small. However, the monitor 7 is sufficiently disposed on the front side in the front-rear X direction. As a result, the allowable value of the tilt angle when the operating rod 15 is tilted forward can be sufficiently increased. This is because the operation rod 15 or the attachment AT does not collide with the monitor 7 even if the operation rod 15 is tilted forward in the front-rear X direction. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, the maximum movable range 320 in which the operation rod 15 is inclined and the attachment AT moves is a linear shape in which the front limit 320a in the front-rear X direction extends in the left-right Y direction in plan view. It is a D-shape. The front limit 320a substantially coincides with the front end in the front-rear X direction of the training apparatus main body 3, but the monitor 7 is positioned further forward in the front-rear X direction than the front limit 320a.
 図31~図35を参照して、モニタアーム301は、モニタスタンド6に設けられ、モニタ7を左右Y方向両側に位置調整可能に、より詳細には水平にスライドするように支持する。具体的には、モニタアーム301は、支持部材302と、スライドレール303と、第1支持ブラケット304と、第2支持ブラケット305とを有している。支持部材302は、スライドレール303全体を収容した状態で支持しており、後述するようにスライドレール303と一体に移動可能になっている。具体的には、支持部材302は、枠部材302aと、枠部材302aの左右Y方向両端に設けられた一対の回転ローラ302b(後述)とを有している。枠部材302aは、上側枠302cと、上側枠302cから下方に離れて配置された下側枠302dと有している。上側枠302cと下側枠302dは左右Y方向両端において回転ローラ302bを支持する部分で互いに連結されている。 Referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 35, the monitor arm 301 is provided on the monitor stand 6 and supports the monitor 7 so that the position of the monitor 7 can be adjusted on both sides in the left and right Y directions, and more specifically, it slides horizontally. Specifically, the monitor arm 301 includes a support member 302, a slide rail 303, a first support bracket 304, and a second support bracket 305. The support member 302 supports the slide rail 303 in an accommodated state, and can move integrally with the slide rail 303 as will be described later. Specifically, the support member 302 includes a frame member 302a and a pair of rotating rollers 302b (described later) provided at both ends of the frame member 302a in the left-right Y direction. The frame member 302a has an upper frame 302c and a lower frame 302d that is arranged to be spaced downward from the upper frame 302c. The upper frame 302c and the lower frame 302d are connected to each other at portions that support the rotating roller 302b at both ends in the left-right Y direction.
 スライドレール303は、左右Y方向に延びており、モニタスタンド6に水平方向にスライド可能に支持されている。具体的には、スライドレール303は、両面式のスライドレールであり、前後X方向後ろ側の面に第1支持ブラケット304が水平方向にスライド自在に装着され、前後X方向前側の面に第2支持ブラケット305が水平方向にスライド自在に装着されている。第1支持ブラケット304には、モニタ7の背面が固定されている。第2支持ブラケット305は、モニタスタンド6の上端部6cに固定されている。 The slide rail 303 extends in the left-right Y direction and is supported by the monitor stand 6 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction. Specifically, the slide rail 303 is a double-sided slide rail, and a first support bracket 304 is slidably mounted horizontally on the back surface in the front-rear X direction, and a second surface is mounted on the front surface in the front-rear X direction. A support bracket 305 is slidably mounted in the horizontal direction. The back surface of the monitor 7 is fixed to the first support bracket 304. The second support bracket 305 is fixed to the upper end portion 6 c of the monitor stand 6.
 より具体的には、図31に示すように、スライドレール303は、フレーム303aと、レール303b~303eとを有している。フレーム303aは、上下Z方向に所定の幅を有して左右Y方向に延びる板状部材である。フレーム303aの本体の上下両端には、前後X方向前側に延びる第2板状部分303fが設けられている。フレーム303aの前後X方向後ろ側には、上下Z方向に並んで第1レール303bと第2レール303cとが固定されている。さらに、フレーム303aの前後X方向前側には、上下Z方向に並んで第3レール303dと第4レール303eとが固定されている。レール303b~303eは、フレーム303aの左右Y方向全体にわたって延びている。 More specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, the slide rail 303 has a frame 303a and rails 303b to 303e. The frame 303a is a plate-like member having a predetermined width in the vertical Z direction and extending in the horizontal Y direction. At both upper and lower ends of the main body of the frame 303a, a second plate-like portion 303f extending forward in the front-rear X direction is provided. A first rail 303b and a second rail 303c are fixed on the rear side in the front-rear X direction of the frame 303a so as to be aligned in the vertical Z direction. Further, the third rail 303d and the fourth rail 303e are fixed to the front side of the frame 303a in the front-rear X direction so as to be aligned in the vertical Z direction. The rails 303b to 303e extend over the entire left and right Y direction of the frame 303a.
 フレーム303aの上下Z方向両側には、枠部材302aの上側枠302cと下側枠302dとがそれぞれ配置されている。上側枠302c(及び下側枠302d)は、前後X方向に所定の幅を有して左右Y方向に延びる第1プレート302eと、第1プレート302eの前後X方向両側から上下Z方向に延びる一対の第2プレート302fとを有している。第1プレート302eには、上下Z方向に所定の幅を有して左右方向Y方向に延びる突起302gが設けられている。突起302gは、フレーム303aの第2板状部分303fに上下Z方向から当接している。このようにして、スライドレール303は、支持部材302によって上下方向に支持されている。 The upper frame 302c and the lower frame 302d of the frame member 302a are respectively arranged on both sides in the vertical Z direction of the frame 303a. The upper frame 302c (and the lower frame 302d) has a first plate 302e having a predetermined width in the front-rear X direction and extending in the left-right Y direction, and a pair extending in the vertical Z direction from both sides in the front-rear X direction of the first plate 302e. The second plate 302f. The first plate 302e is provided with a protrusion 302g having a predetermined width in the vertical Z direction and extending in the horizontal Y direction. The protrusion 302g is in contact with the second plate-like portion 303f of the frame 303a from the vertical Z direction. In this way, the slide rail 303 is supported in the vertical direction by the support member 302.
 第1支持ブラケット304は、第1ブラケット本体304aと、第1ブラケット本体304aに固定された第1ベアリング機構304b及び第2ベアリング機構304cとを有している。図31に示すように、第1ベアリング機構304b及び第2ベアリング機構304cは、第1レール303b及び第2レール303cにそれぞれスライド自在に配置されている。第2支持ブラケット305は、第2ブラケット本体305aと、第2ブラケット本体305aに固定された第3ベアリング機構305b及び第4ベアリング機構305cとを有している。図31に示すように、第3ベアリング機構305b及び第4ベアリング機構305cは、第3レール303d及び第4レール303eにそれぞれスライド自在に配置されている。 The first support bracket 304 has a first bracket body 304a, and a first bearing mechanism 304b and a second bearing mechanism 304c fixed to the first bracket body 304a. As shown in FIG. 31, the first bearing mechanism 304b and the second bearing mechanism 304c are slidably disposed on the first rail 303b and the second rail 303c, respectively. The second support bracket 305 includes a second bracket main body 305a, and a third bearing mechanism 305b and a fourth bearing mechanism 305c fixed to the second bracket main body 305a. As shown in FIG. 31, the third bearing mechanism 305b and the fourth bearing mechanism 305c are slidably disposed on the third rail 303d and the fourth rail 303e, respectively.
 以上に述べた構成では、スライドレール303はモニタスタンド6に対して水平方向にスライドし、さらにモニタ7はスライドレール303に対して水平方向に移動するので、スライドレールのスライドストロークを小さく抑えながらモニタ7の移動量を大きくとることができ、モニタ7を左右Y方向片側に移動させた場合にスライドレール303がモニタスタンド6から左右Y方向反対側に突出して残る量が少なくて済む。図32では、モニタ7が最も左右Y方向左側に移動しており、この場合にスライドレール303及び支持部材302がモニタスタンド6からさらに左右Y方向右側に突出して残る量が少なくて済んでいる。図34では、モニタ7が最も左右Y方向右側に移動しており、その場合も同様な効果が得られる。なお、図32におけるモニタ7の位置は椅子4が右腕訓練位置321(図27参照)にあるときの訓練に採用され、図34におけるモニタ7の位置は椅子4が左腕訓練位置322にあるときの訓練に採用される。 In the configuration described above, the slide rail 303 slides in the horizontal direction with respect to the monitor stand 6, and the monitor 7 moves in the horizontal direction with respect to the slide rail 303, so that the monitor can be performed while keeping the slide rail slide stroke small. 7 can be increased, and when the monitor 7 is moved to one side in the left-right Y direction, the amount of the slide rail 303 protruding from the monitor stand 6 to the opposite side in the left-right Y direction can be reduced. In FIG. 32, the monitor 7 has moved to the left in the left-right Y direction, and in this case, the amount of the slide rail 303 and the support member 302 protruding from the monitor stand 6 further to the right in the left-right Y direction is small. In FIG. 34, the monitor 7 is most moved to the right in the left-right Y direction, and the same effect can be obtained in this case. 32 is used for training when the chair 4 is in the right arm training position 321 (see FIG. 27), and the position of the monitor 7 in FIG. 34 is the position when the chair 4 is in the left arm training position 322. Adopted for training.
 以上に述べた構成では、モニタ7は、モニタアーム301によって、モニタスタンド6に対して左右Y方向両側に位置調整可能になっている。したがって、図27に示すように、椅子4が右腕訓練位置321にあると場合と左腕訓練位置322にある場合とで、モニタ7をモニタアーム301を用いて左右Y方向に位置決めすることで、モニタ7を患者Tにとって見やすい位置(例えば、患者Tの正面)に配置できる。特に、モニタアーム301は、水平にスライドするようにモニタ7を支持しているので、モニタ7を左右Y方向に移動する操作が容易である。 In the configuration described above, the position of the monitor 7 can be adjusted by the monitor arm 301 on both sides in the left and right Y directions with respect to the monitor stand 6. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 27, the monitor 7 is positioned in the left and right Y directions using the monitor arm 301 when the chair 4 is at the right arm training position 321 and when the chair 4 is at the left arm training position 322. 7 can be placed at a position that is easy for the patient T to see (for example, the front of the patient T). In particular, since the monitor arm 301 supports the monitor 7 so as to slide horizontally, an operation for moving the monitor 7 in the left-right Y direction is easy.
 以上に述べたように、モニタ7を左右Y方向に移動させる作業は、モニタ7を左右Y方向にスライドするだけであり、つまり、モニタ7の取り外し・取り付け作業が不要である。したがって、上肢訓練装置1において、簡単な作業によって、モニタ7を患者Tにとって見やすい位置に配置できる。 As described above, the operation of moving the monitor 7 in the left-right Y direction is merely sliding the monitor 7 in the left-right Y direction, that is, the work of removing and attaching the monitor 7 is not necessary. Therefore, in the upper limb training apparatus 1, the monitor 7 can be arranged at a position that is easy for the patient T to see by simple work.
 モニタアーム301についてさらに詳細に説明する。モニタアーム301は、さらに、ベルト309を有している。ベルト309は、無端形状であり、支持部材302の回転ローラ302bに巻き掛けられている。ベルト309は可撓性を有している。ベルト309は、スライドレール303の全長を覆っている。したがって、操作者がスライドレール303に直接触れることが防止されている。ベルト309には第1支持ブラケット304と第2支持ブラケット305が固定されており、そのためベルト309を介して第1支持ブラケット304とスライドレール303が左右Y方向に連動するようになっている。第1支持ブラケット304と第2支持ブラケット305は、図33に示すように、支持部材302及びスライドレール303の左右Y方向中心において両者が一致するように、それぞれベルト309に固定されている。 The monitor arm 301 will be described in more detail. The monitor arm 301 further has a belt 309. The belt 309 has an endless shape and is wound around the rotating roller 302b of the support member 302. The belt 309 has flexibility. The belt 309 covers the entire length of the slide rail 303. Therefore, the operator is prevented from touching the slide rail 303 directly. The first support bracket 304 and the second support bracket 305 are fixed to the belt 309, so that the first support bracket 304 and the slide rail 303 are interlocked in the left and right Y directions via the belt 309. As shown in FIG. 33, the first support bracket 304 and the second support bracket 305 are respectively fixed to the belt 309 so that the support member 302 and the slide rail 303 coincide with each other at the center in the left-right Y direction.
 より具体的には、図31に示すように、ベルト309は、枠部材302aの第2プレート302fの内側に沿って配置されており、枠部材302aとともにスライドレール303を覆うように配置されている。図から明らかなように、ベルト309の幅(上下Z方向長さ)は、上下の第2プレート302fの縁間の長さより長くなっている。これにより、ベルト309は枠部材302aの内部を外部から遮断している。 More specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, the belt 309 is disposed along the inside of the second plate 302f of the frame member 302a, and is disposed so as to cover the slide rail 303 together with the frame member 302a. . As is apparent from the figure, the width (length in the vertical Z direction) of the belt 309 is longer than the length between the edges of the upper and lower second plates 302f. As a result, the belt 309 blocks the inside of the frame member 302a from the outside.
 以上の構成において、操作者がモニタ7を左右Y方向片側に移動させると、第1支持ブラケット304の動きに伴ってベルト309が駆動され、それによりスライドレール303も同じ側に移動させられる。このように第1支持ブラケット304とスライドレール303とが連動するので、モニタ7の移動を1回の動作で行うことができる。したがって、モニタ7を移動させる操作性が向上しており、例えば腕に障害がある患者Tであってもモニタ7を簡単に移動できる。 In the above configuration, when the operator moves the monitor 7 to one side in the left-right Y direction, the belt 309 is driven in accordance with the movement of the first support bracket 304, and thereby the slide rail 303 is also moved to the same side. Thus, since the 1st support bracket 304 and the slide rail 303 interlock | cooperate, the movement of the monitor 7 can be performed by one operation | movement. Therefore, the operability for moving the monitor 7 is improved. For example, the monitor 7 can be easily moved even if the patient T has a handicapped arm.
 特に、第1支持ブラケット304がモニタスタンド6に対してスライド移動する量はスライドレール303がモニタスタンド6に対してスライド移動する量の2倍であるので、第1支持ブラケット304及びモニタ7の移動速度がスライドレール303の移動速度の2倍になっている。したがって、モニタ7が左右に移動されるときに、所定の位置まで速やかにモニタ7を移動させることができる。 In particular, the amount by which the first support bracket 304 slides relative to the monitor stand 6 is twice the amount by which the slide rail 303 slides relative to the monitor stand 6, so that the first support bracket 304 and the monitor 7 move. The speed is twice the moving speed of the slide rail 303. Therefore, when the monitor 7 is moved left and right, the monitor 7 can be quickly moved to a predetermined position.
 モニタアーム301は、図35に示すように、モニタ移動用ハンドル306と、ゴムローラ307と、ねじりバネ308とをさらに有している。モニタ移動用ハンドル306は、第1支持ブラケット304又はモニタ7に回動可能に装着されている。具体的には、第1支持ブラケット304から延びる一対のフレーム304dに支持されている。モニタ移動用ハンドル306は、左右Y方向に延びる延長部306aと、延長部306aの両端から直角に折り曲げられて延びる一対のハンドル部306bとを有している。延長部306aは、第1支持ブラケット304の一対のフレーム304dに形成された孔304e内に挿入されている。 The monitor arm 301 further includes a monitor moving handle 306, a rubber roller 307, and a torsion spring 308, as shown in FIG. The monitor moving handle 306 is rotatably attached to the first support bracket 304 or the monitor 7. Specifically, it is supported by a pair of frames 304 d extending from the first support bracket 304. The monitor moving handle 306 has an extension part 306a extending in the left-right Y direction and a pair of handle parts 306b extending by being bent at right angles from both ends of the extension part 306a. The extension 306a is inserted into holes 304e formed in the pair of frames 304d of the first support bracket 304.
 ゴムローラ307は、モニタ移動用ハンドル306に固定されている。具体的には、ゴムローラ307は、モニタ移動用ハンドル306の延長部306aに装着されたカムブラケット313に固定されている。ゴムローラ307は摩擦係数が高い材料(例えばシリコンゴムの表層を持つ)から構成された円柱状の部材であり、左右Y方向に延びている。 The rubber roller 307 is fixed to the monitor moving handle 306. Specifically, the rubber roller 307 is fixed to a cam bracket 313 attached to an extension 306 a of the monitor moving handle 306. The rubber roller 307 is a columnar member made of a material having a high friction coefficient (for example, having a silicon rubber surface layer), and extends in the left-right Y direction.
 ねじりバネ308は、ゴムローラ307が支持部材302の下側の枠部材302aの下面に接触するようにモニタ移動用ハンドル306を付勢する。ねじりバネ308は、フレーム304dに装着される。ねじりバネ308は、図35に示すように、モニタ移動用ハンドル306が延長部306aの左右Y方向に延びる軸中心Qを中心に、ゴムローラ307が下側の枠部材302aの下面に当接する方向(図35における時計まわり)に回動するように弾性力を与えている。その結果、図35に示すように、ゴムローラ307は支持部材302の枠部材302aの下側枠302dの下面に押し付けられている。このようにゴムローラ307が支持部材302に摩擦連結しているので、第1支持ブラケット304が支持部材302及びスライドレール303に対して移動不能になっている。また、第1支持ブラケット304がスライドレール303と連動しているので、スライドレール303もモニタスタンド6に対して移動不能になっている。
 なお、以上のモニタ7の左右Y方向移動が防止された状態において、図35に示すように、モニタ移動用ハンドル306のハンドル部306bは真下に向かって延びている。
The torsion spring 308 urges the monitor moving handle 306 so that the rubber roller 307 contacts the lower surface of the lower frame member 302a of the support member 302. The torsion spring 308 is attached to the frame 304d. As shown in FIG. 35, the torsion spring 308 has a direction in which the rubber roller 307 comes into contact with the lower surface of the lower frame member 302a with the monitor moving handle 306 centering on the axial center Q extending in the left-right Y direction of the extension 306a ( An elastic force is applied so as to rotate clockwise in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 35, the rubber roller 307 is pressed against the lower surface of the lower frame 302d of the frame member 302a of the support member 302. Since the rubber roller 307 is frictionally connected to the support member 302 in this manner, the first support bracket 304 is immovable with respect to the support member 302 and the slide rail 303. Further, since the first support bracket 304 is interlocked with the slide rail 303, the slide rail 303 is also immovable with respect to the monitor stand 6.
In the state where the above-described movement of the monitor 7 in the left-right Y direction is prevented, as shown in FIG. 35, the handle portion 306b of the monitor moving handle 306 extends downward.
 操作者がモニタ移動用ハンドル306を前後X方向後ろ側(図35において右側)に回動すると、ゴムローラ307が支持部材302から離れて、第1支持ブラケット304がスライドレール303に対して移動可能となる。つまり、操作者はモニタ移動用ハンドル306を持って第1支持ブラケット304を移動可能にした状態で、そのまま第1支持ブラケット304及びモニタ7を左右Y方向に移動させることができる。このように、ロック解除動作及びモニタ移動動作が連続して行えるので、モニタ7の移動させるときの操作性がよい。
 なお、この実施例では、モニタ移動用ハンドル306は左右方向両側にハンドル部306bを有しているので、操作者は、モニタ7に対して左右Y方向のどちら側にいたとしても、容易にモニタ移動用ハンドル306を操作できる。
When the operator rotates the monitor moving handle 306 rearward in the front-rear X direction (right side in FIG. 35), the rubber roller 307 moves away from the support member 302 and the first support bracket 304 can move relative to the slide rail 303. Become. That is, the operator can move the first support bracket 304 and the monitor 7 in the left and right Y directions as they are while holding the monitor moving handle 306 and moving the first support bracket 304. Thus, since the unlocking operation and the monitor moving operation can be performed continuously, the operability when moving the monitor 7 is good.
In this embodiment, since the monitor moving handle 306 has handle portions 306b on both sides in the left-right direction, the operator can easily monitor the monitor 7 regardless of which side it is in the left-right Y direction. The moving handle 306 can be operated.
 図27に示すように、モニタスタンド6には、上肢訓練装置1を運搬するための運搬用ハンドル310が固定されている。運搬用ハンドル310は、モニタスタンド6の上端部6cに装着されている。運搬用ハンドル310は、固定部310aと、固定部310aから左右Y方向両側に延びる一対のハンドル部310bとを有している。
 このように運搬用ハンドル310が目立っておりかつ使いやすい位置・形状であるので、操作者は、上肢訓練装置1を運搬するときに、自然と運搬用ハンドル310をつかむ。つまり、操作者が運搬のためにモニタ7又はモニタアーム301をつかむことが生じにくい。以上より、上肢訓練装置1が外力によって破損しにくい。
As shown in FIG. 27, a carrying handle 310 for carrying the upper limb training apparatus 1 is fixed to the monitor stand 6. The carrying handle 310 is attached to the upper end portion 6 c of the monitor stand 6. The carrying handle 310 includes a fixed portion 310a and a pair of handle portions 310b extending from the fixed portion 310a to both sides in the left-right Y direction.
Thus, the carrying handle 310 is conspicuous and has an easy-to-use position and shape, so that the operator naturally holds the carrying handle 310 when carrying the upper limb training apparatus 1. That is, it is difficult for the operator to hold the monitor 7 or the monitor arm 301 for transportation. From the above, the upper limb training apparatus 1 is not easily damaged by external force.
 図28に示すように、スライドレール303は、モニタスタンド6に上下Z方向に移動可能に支持されている。具体的には、第2支持ブラケット305は、ロック機構311によってモニタスタンド6に固定されており、ロック機構311が解除されるとモニタスタンド6に対して上端部6cの範囲で上下Z方向に移動可能になる。ロック機構311は図示しないスプリングを有しており、通常はスプリングの付勢力によってロックされており、人が付勢力を解除するとモニタアーム301はモニタスタンド6に対して上下動可能になっている。これにより、モニタ7を患者Tの顔の高さ位置に合わせることができる。 As shown in FIG. 28, the slide rail 303 is supported by the monitor stand 6 so as to be movable in the vertical Z direction. Specifically, the second support bracket 305 is fixed to the monitor stand 6 by the lock mechanism 311 and moves in the vertical Z direction within the range of the upper end portion 6c with respect to the monitor stand 6 when the lock mechanism 311 is released. It becomes possible. The lock mechanism 311 has a spring (not shown) and is normally locked by the urging force of the spring. When a person releases the urging force, the monitor arm 301 can move up and down with respect to the monitor stand 6. Thereby, the monitor 7 can be adjusted to the height position of the face of the patient T.
(6)他の実施形態
 以上、本発明の一実施形態について説明したが、本発明は上記実施形態に限定されるものではなく、発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲で種々の変更が可能である。特に、本明細書に書かれた複数の実施形態及び変形例は必要に応じて任意に組み合せ可能である。
(6) Other Embodiments Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the invention. In particular, a plurality of embodiments and modifications described in this specification can be arbitrarily combined as necessary.
 (a)前記実施形態では、上肢訓練装置において上肢の機能回復訓練を目的とするために用いたが、本発明に係る上肢訓練装置の用途はこれに限定されない。例えば、上肢の機能を向上させる、つまり上肢の筋肉を増強する訓練に用いることもできる。
 (b)前記実施形態では、10個のピン端子84aと10個の接点端子159とが接触する場合の例を示したが、ピン端子84aの個数及び接点端子159の個数は、複数で同じ個数であればどのような個数に設定しても良い。
(A) In the said embodiment, although it used in order to aim at the functional recovery training of the upper limb in the upper limb training apparatus, the use of the upper limb training apparatus according to the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it can also be used for training to improve the function of the upper limbs, that is, to strengthen the muscles of the upper limbs.
(B) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which ten pin terminals 84a and ten contact terminals 159 are in contact with each other is shown. However, the number of pin terminals 84a and the number of contact terminals 159 are plural and the same number. Any number may be set as long as it is.
 本発明は、上肢の機能回復及び上肢の筋力増強等の訓練に用いる上肢訓練装置として広く用いることができる。 The present invention can be widely used as an upper limb training apparatus used for training such as functional recovery of upper limbs and muscle strength enhancement of upper limbs.
1    上肢訓練装置
3    訓練装置本体
4    椅子
5    連結具
6    モニタスタンド
7    モニタ
10   フレーム
11   固定フレーム
12   可動フレーム
13   傾動抵抗付与機構
14   傾動操作力検出機構
15   操作ロッド
16   伸縮抵抗付与機構
17   伸縮操作力検出機構
17a  ポテンショメータ
17b  センサヘッド
57 操作ロッド本体
59 アタッチメント取付部(付属品取付部)
84a ピン端子(突出端子)
110 制御部
159 接点端子
184 信号受信部
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Upper limb training apparatus 3 Training apparatus main body 4 Chair 5 Connection tool 6 Monitor stand 7 Monitor 10 Frame 11 Fixed frame 12 Movable frame 13 Tilt resistance application mechanism 14 Tilt operation force detection mechanism 15 Operation rod 16 Expansion / contraction resistance provision mechanism 17 Expansion / contraction operation force detection Mechanism 17a Potentiometer 17b Sensor head 57 Operating rod body 59 Attachment mounting part (accessory mounting part)
84a pin terminal (protruding terminal)
110 control unit 159 contact terminal 184 signal receiving unit

Claims (5)

  1.  訓練を受ける人の上肢を訓練可能な上肢訓練装置であって、
     床面上に配置可能な固定フレームと、
     全方向に傾動可能に前記固定フレームに支持された可動フレームと、
     前記可動フレームに装着され、前記訓練を受ける人が手で操作する操作ロッドと、
     前記可動フレームの傾倒動作を制御する制御部と、
    を備え
     前記操作ロッドは、操作ロッド本体と、訓練を受ける人が把持する又は訓練を受ける人の手を固定するための付属品を取り付けるために前記操作ロッド本体の先端部に装着される付属品取付部とを有し、
     前記制御部は、前記付属品が前記付属品取付部に装着された状態で、前記付属品に固有である信号を、識別する信号受信部を有する、
    上肢訓練装置。
    An upper limb training apparatus capable of training an upper limb of a person who receives training,
    A fixed frame that can be placed on the floor;
    A movable frame supported by the fixed frame so as to be tiltable in all directions;
    An operation rod mounted on the movable frame and operated by a person who receives the training;
    A control unit for controlling the tilting operation of the movable frame;
    The operation rod includes an operation rod main body and an accessory attached to a distal end portion of the operation rod main body for attaching an operation rod main body and an accessory for holding a training person or holding a training person's hand. A mounting portion,
    The control unit includes a signal receiving unit that identifies a signal unique to the accessory in a state where the accessory is attached to the accessory mounting unit.
    Upper limb training device.
  2.  前記制御部は、前記信号受信部が受信した前記信号に基づいて、前記付属品の種類を判定する、請求項1に記載の上肢訓練装置。 The upper limb training apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the control unit determines a type of the accessory based on the signal received by the signal receiving unit.
  3.  前記制御部は、前記信号に基づいて判定した前記付属品の種類に応じて、適切な上肢訓練プログラムを起動し、上肢訓練プログラムに基づいて、前記上肢訓練装置を制御する、請求項2に記載の上肢訓練装置。 The said control part starts an appropriate upper limb training program according to the kind of said accessory determined based on the said signal, and controls the said upper limb training apparatus based on an upper limb training program. Upper limb training device.
  4.  前記付属品と付属品取付部の双方に電気接点を設け、前記付属品を前記付属品取付部に装着したときに有線で信号を送受する、請求項1~3のいずれかに記載の上肢訓練装置。 The upper limb training according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein an electrical contact is provided on both the accessory and the accessory mounting portion, and signals are transmitted and received by wire when the accessory is attached to the accessory mounting portion. apparatus.
  5.  前記付属品取付部は、前記付属品取付部の上面から外方に突出する複数の突出端子を有しており、
     前記付属品は、複数の前記突出端子それぞれに対応する接点端子を有しており、所定の2つの前記接点端子が短絡しており、
     前記制御部は、前記付属品が前記付属品取付部に装着されたときに、短絡した所定の2つの前記接点端子と、所定の2つの前記接点端子それぞれに対応した前記突出端子との間が導通し、導通パターンに応じた前記付属品の種類を判定する、請求項1~4のいずれかに記載の上肢訓練装置。
    The accessory mounting portion has a plurality of protruding terminals protruding outward from the upper surface of the accessory mounting portion,
    The accessory has a contact terminal corresponding to each of the plurality of protruding terminals, and the two predetermined contact terminals are short-circuited,
    When the accessory is mounted on the accessory mounting portion, the control unit has a gap between the predetermined two contact terminals that are short-circuited and the protruding terminals corresponding to the two predetermined contact terminals, respectively. The upper limb training apparatus according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the upper limb training apparatus is conductive and determines a type of the accessory according to a conduction pattern.
PCT/JP2011/054442 2011-02-28 2011-02-28 Upper limb exercising device WO2012117487A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013502065A JPWO2012117487A1 (en) 2011-02-28 2011-02-28 Upper limb training device
PCT/JP2011/054442 WO2012117487A1 (en) 2011-02-28 2011-02-28 Upper limb exercising device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2011/054442 WO2012117487A1 (en) 2011-02-28 2011-02-28 Upper limb exercising device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2012117487A1 true WO2012117487A1 (en) 2012-09-07

Family

ID=46757455

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2011/054442 WO2012117487A1 (en) 2011-02-28 2011-02-28 Upper limb exercising device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2012117487A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2012117487A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2018038581A (en) * 2016-09-07 2018-03-15 株式会社イープル Articular movement training device and articular movement training method
CN113730195A (en) * 2021-10-08 2021-12-03 四川大学华西医院 Recovered device of orthopedics that internet control was used

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10293133A (en) * 1997-04-18 1998-11-04 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Scanning proximity field optical microscope
JPH11253504A (en) * 1998-03-12 1999-09-21 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Upper limb motion assisting device
JP2001265194A (en) * 2000-03-16 2001-09-28 Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd Image forming method
JP2007520313A (en) * 2004-02-05 2007-07-26 モトリカ インク Methods and instruments for rehabilitation and training
WO2008123200A1 (en) * 2007-03-27 2008-10-16 Gifu University Motion assisting device and its control method

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH10293133A (en) * 1997-04-18 1998-11-04 Olympus Optical Co Ltd Scanning proximity field optical microscope
JPH11253504A (en) * 1998-03-12 1999-09-21 Sanyo Electric Co Ltd Upper limb motion assisting device
JP2001265194A (en) * 2000-03-16 2001-09-28 Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd Image forming method
JP2007520313A (en) * 2004-02-05 2007-07-26 モトリカ インク Methods and instruments for rehabilitation and training
WO2008123200A1 (en) * 2007-03-27 2008-10-16 Gifu University Motion assisting device and its control method

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2018038581A (en) * 2016-09-07 2018-03-15 株式会社イープル Articular movement training device and articular movement training method
CN113730195A (en) * 2021-10-08 2021-12-03 四川大学华西医院 Recovered device of orthopedics that internet control was used
CN113730195B (en) * 2021-10-08 2022-09-23 四川大学华西医院 Recovered device of orthopedics with internet control

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2012117487A1 (en) 2014-07-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP5821945B2 (en) Upper limb training device
JP5630559B2 (en) Upper limb training device
JP5630563B2 (en) Upper limb training device
JP5772947B2 (en) Upper limb training device
JP5630561B2 (en) Upper limb training device
JP5630562B2 (en) Upper limb training device
US8348869B2 (en) Upper limbs rehabilitation device
JP5630564B2 (en) Upper limb training device
US20210059887A1 (en) Upper limb exercise apparatus and control method therefor
JP5630560B2 (en) Upper limb training device
JP2002126019A (en) Leg training device
WO2012117487A1 (en) Upper limb exercising device
KR101999543B1 (en) Upper limb rehabilitation device with handgrip tilting function
KR102628161B1 (en) Shoulder rehabilitation apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11860072

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2013502065

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 11860072

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1